JP7305453B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state advantageous to a player and a second advantageous state more advantageous than the first advantageous state.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally , there is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for a player (see Patent Document 1, for example). In such a game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting values, the next process can only be performed when the main process being executed is all completed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are finished, and the setting confirmation work cannot be preferably performed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enables quick confirmation of settings .

The gaming machine described in means A is
The game machine performs variable display of decoration identification information and variable display of predetermined identification information different from the decoration identification information based on passage of a game medium into a starting area, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player. hand,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
a state notification means for notifying that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state;
an effect executing means capable of executing a foretelling effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state;
As the preview performance,
a specific effect in which a specific light emitting means emits light and a specific sound is output based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area;
An operation effect involving an operation to the effect operation means;
including a movable body production that accompanies the movement of the movable body,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted,
The interrupt process is permitted when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interruption process is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted;
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the predetermined identification information, the specific effect, the operation effect, and the movable object effect are not executed,
The production executing means is
Even when controlled to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to receive operation confirmation information for confirming the operation of the predetermined effect means,
When receiving the operation confirmation information in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute processing according to the operation confirmation information.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The gaming machine described in means 1 is
Variable display is performed, and includes a first advantageous state (for example, a big win game state of jackpot A) advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous than the first advantageous state. A game machine which has a plurality of advantageous states and can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) (Pachinko game machine 1). and
A first period from the end of the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a period until the variable display is performed 50 times), and after the variable display is performed the predetermined number of times In a period including at least a second period (for example, a period in which the 51st to 100th or 51st to 150th variable display is performed), the frequency in which the variable display is performed is a special state (for example, a high game state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing) and
When executing variable display, the first variable display period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6) and the first variable A second variable display period that is longer than the display period (for example, 180 seconds, which is the special fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8-6) From among a plurality of different variable display periods Variable display period determination means for determining the variable display period of 1 (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17);
A notification effect that notifies that the control is at least in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that moves the body 179SG300) is the first timing during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the timing in 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach) A second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), a timing within 23 seconds or 33 seconds from reaching reach during variable display to ending variable display ), a notification effect execution means that can be executed at a plurality of different timings (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
The notification effect executing means has a higher ratio of the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state during the first period than during the second period. The notification effect can be executed at the first timing, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C), the 1st to 50th variable When the variable display result is the big hit B in the display, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing, and when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. , the portion where the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the second timing),
When the variable display of the second variable display period is executed in the first period, it is possible to execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 8-35 Part that can execute all rotation reach production as special reach production by executing special reach production pattern determination processing),
In the special notification effect, it is possible to execute an effect using a mode corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45, a rainbow colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed),
The variable display period determination means is such that the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is higher when executed during the first period than during the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period when the variable display is executed in the second period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is running (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, the 1-50th variable display in the high base state). When the variable display result is the big hit B, the variable pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and the variation pattern is variable in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. If the display result is a big hit B, the part that always determines the fluctuation pattern to be one of the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table A)
moreover,
The selection ratio of the variable display period (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing", in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is higher than the first period [excluding the final change])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from occurring consecutively in a short period of time, and to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to an increase in the variable display period. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The notification effect executing means can execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period when the variable display of the second variable display period is executed in the first period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Part that can execute all rotation reach production as special reach production by executing special reach production pattern determination processing shown in FIG. 8-35)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect using a mode corresponding to the second advantageous state in the special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45, the image display device 5 The part that displays the rainbow effect image 179SG005M in
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand that the player is in the second advantageous state, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 2 or 3,
The notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect in a plurality of patterns including a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, FIGS. 8-35 and 8- As shown in 36, the part where the special reach effect can be executed by any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ),
The special notification effect is further provided with restricting means for limiting repeated execution in the same pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect pattern of the special reach effect was The part that is determined from the excluded production patterns)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the repeated execution of the special notification effect in the same pattern.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
The notification effect executing means executes the variable display based on the control to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. It is possible to execute the notification effect at the first timing at a higher rate than when the variable display is executed in the first period (for example, variable display in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state When the result is a big hit A, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, and the variable display result is a big hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result becomes a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, as shown in FIG. A portion in which the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period until the ready-to-win state is reached, and that the variable display result is a big win (jackpot B)),
The variable display period determination means is configured to control to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. The second variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when the variable display performed is performed in the first period (eg, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17). When the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and the high base. When the variable display result is a jackpot A in the variable display after the 1st to 50th times of the state, by selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is always normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β. part determined by the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period, the variable display in the second variable display period having a longer period is easily executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the gambling property due to a shortened interval in which the advantageous state is obtained, and the notification effect is easily executed at the early first timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the delay caused by the execution of the variable display.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
A special state entry effect (for example, a first high-base state entry effect or a second high-base state entry effect as an ending effect) for notifying that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state ends can be executed. Special state rush production execution means (for example, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes the ending production process shown in FIG. 8-38),
When the advantageous state is controlled, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state is the second advantageous state before the advantageous state ends (for example, a jackpot game as shown in FIG. 8-44 (B) Advantageous state type notification means (for example, a part for notifying that the jackpot game is a 16 round jackpot (jackpot B) in the 8th round) (for example, a part for the production control CPU 120 to execute a jackpot middle production process);
further comprising
The game state control means, as the special state, the first special state (for example, a high probability high base that executes time-saving control over 100 variable displays and definite variable control over 150 variable displays state) and a second special state that is more advantageous than the first special state (for example, a high-accuracy high base state that performs time-saving control and probability-variable control over 150 variable displays), When the first advantageous state ends, control to the first special state, and when the second advantageous state ends, control to the second special state (for example, in the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 8-19 by the CPU 103 , If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variable number counter is set to "150" and the time saving counter is set to "100", and if the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter are set. The part that sets "150"),
The special state entry effect execution means is
A first special state entry effect (for example, a first high base state entry effect as an ending effect) for informing that the first special state is controlled when the first advantageous state ends, is executable; A second special state rushing effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies that the second special state is controlled when the second advantageous state ends, and has a longer effect period than the first special state rushing effect. as the second high base state rush effect) can be executed,
As the second special state entry effect, after starting the effect in the same manner as the first special state entry effect, a switching effect (for example, FIG. 8-39 As shown in (B), after executing the first high base state entry effect, the movable body 179SG300 operates as part of the second high base state rush effect, thereby controlling the high base state with a variable number of display times. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a part in which a certain “100 times” display is updated to “150 times” display).
According to this feature, when the advantageous second advantageous state ends, the second special state rushing effect having a long effect period at the time of termination is executed, so that the interval between the advantageous states is shortened and the gambling property is excessively increased. You can prevent it from getting too high.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include inventions related to means A1 and subsequent means below. Conventionally, in game machines, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values that have different advantages for a player, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306. A game machine that selects a variation pattern has been proposed.

However, in a game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, if the set value is high, the period required until the next big win occurs is short, and the gambling nature becomes too high. There is a problem that sound playability cannot be realized. In addition, when the set value is low, there is a problem that the period required until the next big hit occurs is long, which reduces the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, while realizing sound game playability and improving interest.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing", in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is higher than the first period [excluding the final change])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time reduction state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Since the production mode is controlled to Chance Time even in one period, the common "Evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common characters "Chance Time" are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge performance is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the fact that the game state is different from the advantageous state and is controlled a predetermined number of times to the special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). When the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 after shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), the number of occurrences of small wins is changed to 50th. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display of the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
Provided with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
Equipped with production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A10 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Corresponding display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (holding display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means A11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10,
Production control means for controlling production (production control CPU 120),
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the foreseeing advance notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), it is possible to set any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player, and the variation according to the set value A game machine for selecting patterns has been proposed. When a game machine capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (Fig. 19) is controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player. There is room for improving the interest of The inventions relating to means B1 to means B11 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and in a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values, control is performed in a state advantageous to the player. The purpose is to improve the interest when being played.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
With production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect for informing whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (the effect control CPU 120 has a variation pattern with super reach (“super reach out”, “super In "reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not the jackpot is won by having a battle between the ally character and the enemy character),
The execution ratio of the specific effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the specific effect in the second period (when the variable display result is "no", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A1) In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the percentage of selecting "super reach out" as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], whereas as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C1), In the second period, the percentage of “super reach out” selected as the variation pattern is [0%])
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when the game state is the special state.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time saving state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge performance is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) that is different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, it is possible to control to the special state in response to the fact that the game state is different from the advantageous state and is controlled a predetermined number of times to the special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). When the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of small wins reaches 50 after shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), the number of occurrences of small wins is changed to 50th. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display of the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a special effect suggesting a set value (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect),
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggesting effect, second setting suggesting effect) as a special effect suggesting a set value,
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the game state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (reserved display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (reserved display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an action effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means B11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the look-ahead notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), any one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player can be set, and an effect suggesting the set value can be set. A gaming machine has been proposed that executes With respect to the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-47306 (FIG. 19), there is room for improving the interest of the presentation related to the setting suggestions. The inventions relating to the means C1 to C11 have been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and their object is to improve the interest of the performance related to the suggestion of the setting.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling the game state;
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) related to setting suggestion,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
The selection ratio of the specific variable display pattern differs between the first period and the second period (when the variable display result is "mismatch", as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1) , The selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach (“missing super reach”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern (“missing super reach”) with super reach in the second period) ,
The execution ratio of the special effect differs between the first period and the second period (in the first period, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display, so On the other hand, in the second period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final change of the second period, so the final change of the second period The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except for is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for the final variation in the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a game state different from the special state (high probability/high base state (probability variable state)) and a predetermined state (low probability/high base state (time saving state) advantageous to the player )) and
The effect control means can execute a common effect in the predetermined state and the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-4 (B1) and (C1), the effect control CPU 120 can After the end, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the first of any game state Even in one period, the production mode is controlled to chance time, so the common "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters are displayed at the top of the screen. ing)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The effect control means can execute a suggestive effect suggesting transition from the first period to the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7) , 1st period [final variation] (the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the 1st special symbol is "big hit", or the variation display result of the 2nd special symbol is "big hit" After the 100th special game), the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is controllable to a special state (small winning game state) which is a game state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player,
The special state is a gaming state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled to a state where a small hit is likely to occur, and a low base state By controlling, the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened, and the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that game balls can easily enter.)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
It is possible to control the special state in response to the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times in the predetermined state (after the jackpot game is over, the state is shifted to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and 100 times of fluctuation When the next big hit does not occur in the display, the continuation challenge effect is executed in the 100th variation display, and from the 101st variation display, it shifts to a high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state).)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
After the end of the advantageous state (big win game state), a predetermined state (high probability/first KT) which is a game state different from the special state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and advantageous to the player. state (variable state)) can be controlled,
In the predetermined state, the game state is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to the special state in response to being controlled a predetermined number of times to a special state that is advantageous to the player (high accuracy/high probability after the end of the jackpot game). After shifting to the 1st KT state (probability variable state), if the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the fluctuation display will be the 50th occurrence of the small win. Executes the continuous challenge performance of the success mode, and shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) from the next time fluctuation display after the fluctuation display where the number of occurrences of the small hit has reached 50 times)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the game state is the predetermined state.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The execution ratio of the special effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the special effect in the second period (in the first period, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display). Therefore, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variable display is 10%.On the other hand, in the second period, it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect only in the final variation of the second period. , the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each variation display except the final change of the second period is 0%, and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of the final change of the second period is 10%)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing a plurality of types of special effects (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect),
The type of special effects that can be executed in the first period and the type of special effects that can be executed in the second period are different (when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), in step S21TM1010 it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed, and in step S21TM1050 it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. As shown, if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), it is determined in step S21TM1080 whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C8,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the change effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the change effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C10 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C9,
Equipped with corresponding display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying corresponding display (suspended display, active display) corresponding to variable display (variable display),
The effect control means can execute an effect effect that acts on the corresponding display (the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect effect that acts on the pending display and the active display),
The execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period (the execution rate of the action presentation is higher in the first period than in the second period). )
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means C11 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C10,
Determining means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is controlled before the variable display (variable display) is executed,
The effect control means can execute a notice effect based on the determination by the determination means (the effect control CPU 120 can predict the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). It is possible to execute a notice production),
The execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the first period is different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period (the execution ratio of the look-ahead notice effect is higher in the first period than in the second period). are)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first period and the second period.

Some conventional game machines can change the probability that the variable display result will be a big hit (probability of being controlled to an advantageous state) by changing the setting value (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). . The gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 includes, for example, a determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random number within a predetermined numerical range for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. , based on the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set in the game machine, it is judged whether or not to control to the advantageous state. Alternatively, it is conceivable to vary the probability of controlling to an advantageous state by varying the number of advantageous state determination values for each set value set in the gaming machine. However, in the case where the advantageous condition determination value is set differently for each setting value set in the game machine, if the advantageous condition determination value is set over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for judgment will match the advantageous condition determination value. Since it is necessary to determine whether or not to perform the control for a plurality of times, there is a problem that the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state increases. The inventions relating to means 1 to 21 have been made by paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state. do.

The gaming machine described in means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine according to means 1,
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means,
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means each time it determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41). 207SGS550), the advantageous condition determination value included in the non-common numerical range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is combined with the advantageous condition determination value included in the common numerical range. , is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the random number values for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination match (for example, the CPU 103 performs 207SG556 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41 in the process of 207SG550, the part that sets the display result determination table according to the set value read out in the process of 207SG550)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the advantageous condition determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set each time the advantageous condition determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous condition. It is possible to prevent inappropriate judgments from being made.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 2,
The storage means can store the set value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determination means as determined used set value information (for example, the CPU 103 can store the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41). In the process of 207SGS566, the set value set in the process of 207SGS550 is updated and stored as the determined used set value),
A collation capable of collating whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately preceding determination by the advantageous state determination means at predetermined intervals. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 compares the set value specified in the process of 207SGS550 with the determined used set value in the process of 207SGS552 shown in FIG. 9-41).
According to this feature, it is possible to identify that an inappropriate advantageous condition determination value is set by inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 3,
The collation means performs collation every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state as the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 performs variable display. The part that executes the processing of 207SGS552 each time it is executed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, each time it is determined by the advantageous state determination means whether or not to control to the advantageous state, the comparison is performed, so that it is possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to means 3 or 4,
Error notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120 error notification processing (207SGS439) that can execute error notification that the set value information is abnormal when the comparison result of the comparison means is not the same) is executed to display a notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, it is possible to make those around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value information is abnormal, and to promptly take measures against the abnormal setting value information.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to means 5,
The game control means controls the game to a game disabled state in which the game is disabled when the result of the verification by the verification means is not the same, and outputs error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. output to the error notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as a comparison result of the 207SGS552, shift to loop processing) and a part that executes the processing of 207SGS554 and transmits an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120, in the error notification process (207SGS439), from the CPU 103 A portion that determines whether or not an error designation command has been received, and executes error notification according to the received error designation command when an error designation command is received)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate game from being executed due to determination based on inappropriate set value information.

The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display,
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the variable display result determination module is The part that determines the variable display result using
Reservation storage means (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 9-39 for start winning judgment processing) capable of storing the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means as a reservation memory when the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied a part that executes the processing of 207SGS510 in
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determining means, whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state can be determined based on the reserved storage. the part that executes the time random number determination process),
further comprising
The pre-determination means performs the pre-determination by executing a process common to the advantageous state determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins The part that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module in the random value determination process)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the advance determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means;
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
further comprising
The game control means can be controlled to the special state based on the determination by the special state determination means to control to the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result has become a small hit) The part that updates the value of the figure process flag to 8 ″ and controls to the small hit game state),
The special state determination value is a common value continuous from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value, and the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination part set as a common numeric range of values),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state based on the special state determination value included in the common numerical range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. Each time, the set value information stored in the storage means is read, and a special state determination value included in the common numerical range corresponding to the set value specified from the read set value information is set (for example, FIG. 9-17 ~ as shown in Figure 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is in the range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always reads the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display, A part that sets a display result determination table according to the read set value and determines whether or not the variable display result is a small hit)
It is characterized by
According to this characteristic part, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, the processing for setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the setting values specified from these setting value information can be shared, so that the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 8,
For the setting value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the pachinko game If the setting value set in machine 1 is 1, the part where the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with respect to the most disadvantageous set value for the player, only the common numerical range of the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range may be targeted to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 9,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range The part that is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined based on the predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 10,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and the probability of determining that the control to the advantageous state is determined is the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value. A game control that can be controlled to a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number that is the number of the advantageous state determination value increased with respect to the normal number based on becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the predetermined reference value within the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in Figures 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to make multiple determinations of whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of values, in the present invention, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value are determined as predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the value, the advantageous state determination means generates a common numerical value range and a non-common numerical value of the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment and the advantageous state judgment value To reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once whether to control to an advantageous state based on a continuous numerical range including the range. can be done.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 11,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state when the advantageous state determining means determines to control to the advantageous state, and controllable to the special state when the special state determining means determines to control to the special state Game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, regardless of the set value, 32767 is the small hit reference value and the The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to have a continuous numerical range from the common second reference value (for example, FIGS. As shown in 9-20, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, but the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set as a small hit reference value of 32767, which is a common value regardless of the fluctuation special figure. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous condition determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The special state determination value is continuous from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the same number is set so as to be in the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, The numerical range is different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, and the small hit standard is always 32767 if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a value, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as a small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special condition judgment value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value that changes according to the set value, the special condition judgment value can always be specified in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including an advantage judgment value and a disadvantage judgment value with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the above-mentioned advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable set value for the player to the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 5) for executing the special symbol process processing, and
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state at the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of whether the setting value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state is set so that the second common numerical range is continuous from the value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. And in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1674, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, definite variable state regardless of whether 32767 is always small It is set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 as a hit reference value, and if the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Regardless of whether The part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Furthermore, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change according to the set value, the special state determination means always sets the numerical range of the special state determination value regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous condition determination means generates a common value for the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random value generation means and the advantageous condition judgment value. A process of determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state because it is only necessary to execute the determination once to determine whether to control to an advantageous state based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range. load can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to a special state based on the range a plurality of times, in the present invention, the second common numerical range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means controls to an advantageous state based on the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value and the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to be in the special state only once, the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. ) is at least set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set value ( 2 to 6 values excluding 1) is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and 9 As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to vary the probabilities of the game being played, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Any set value among a plurality of stages of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) value) can be set (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a judgment random number for judging whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous state determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state;
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a common numerical range for each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237); A non-common numerical range for each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, which is a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) ) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, 1020 is a big hit reference value, The part where the range is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and 9 As shown in -56, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since it is possible to vary the probabilities of the game being played, it is possible to reduce the development load of the game machine regarding the set values. In particular, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical range and a value greater than the maximum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state determination values, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the state judgment value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value, the non-common To further reduce the development load of a game machine with respect to set values since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of advantageous state determination values do not overlap even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases. can be done.

The gaming machine of means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 16,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical range (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) common to each set value that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. is set and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value (for example, FIGS. 9-53 and 9 As shown in -54, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range including 328 consecutive judgment values regardless of the set value. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
Especially in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous condition determination value and the numerical value range of the special condition determination value are set continuously, the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generating means for determination is Whether it is a value between the minimum and maximum values of the value or the special state judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value or not), the random number for judgment generated by the random number generation means for judgment is the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state determination value, or the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control and the processing load for determining whether to control to a special state.

The gaming machine of means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 17,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to each set value),
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same numbers are set so as to form a continuous second common numerical range,
The advantageous condition determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value within the predetermined numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, regardless of the set value, Part where the range from 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value is set as the common numerical range of the small hit determination value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit The number of determination values included in the numerical range of values is 328, and when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655. The numerical range of the judgment value is a numerical range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. As a hit reference value, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value is within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the first reference value, The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. can be performed, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 18,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled between a jackpot game state) and a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, setting values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). 6), a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state , and the probability of being determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is the normal state corresponding to the normal number, which is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to the set value (for example, the normal state or the time saving state) or the advantageous A game control means (for example, CPU 103 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, variable probability state) corresponding to a special number that is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number based on the state. 5) for executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG.
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range not set in the common numerical range and the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantageous set value (for example, 1238 to each set Non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value)
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set to be continuous numerical ranges from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2 is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, with 1020 as the jackpot reference value),
As the special state determination value, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the range is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, the jackpot numerical range is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether it is a normal state or a variable probability state part),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether it is the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, FIGS. 9-17 to 9- 20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 or 1020 to 1674, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In a different range, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or game state is normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as a small hit reference value It is set as a continuous numerical range, and if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the set value and game state are normal state, time saving state, probability variable state Always 32767 small hit reference value The part set as a continuous numerical range from 3267 to 33421 as
The number of special condition determination values is the same number regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit , If the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value that is set, it is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33094 with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the fluctuation special figure is the second If it is a special pattern, regardless of the setting value that is set, the part that is always set as a continuous numerical range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
The special state determination means determines whether or not to control to the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information when executing the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 9-17 and 9-18, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the small hit game state is entered with 328 determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value. part for determining whether or not to control), and when executing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not to control to the special state with the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. Determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19 and 9-20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value) The part that determines whether to control to the winning game state),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, the probability of being controlled to the most advantageous state is set so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol If there is, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 328, and if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is 655 However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346, which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the variable probability state when 6 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1. In the range, with 32767 as a small hit reference value, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special design, it is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special design, 32767 to 33421 part set in the numerical range of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value does not change due to the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value, the special state determination means does not change according to the set value. Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical ranges, the random value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the advantageous state determination value While it is necessary to determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on each numerical range of the state determination value multiple times, in the present invention, the first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is set to be in a continuous numerical range from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means generates the first Based on the continuous numerical range including the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, the determination of whether or not to control to the advantageous state only needs to be performed once. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.
Also, for example, if the common numerical range of the special state judgment value is provided over multiple numerical ranges, each numerical range of the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value On the other hand, in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random value generation means for determination and the common numerical range of the special state determination value. Since it only needs to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.
Further, for example, whether or not the random number value for judgment generated by the random number value generation means for judgment is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state judgment value (the random number value for judgment is the advantageous state judgment value (whether the value is within the numerical range of or not), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value is the predetermined reference value. The state determination means determines whether or not to control to an advantageous state only by specifying the value of the minimum value or the maximum value which is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether or not the judgment random number generated by the judgment random number generating means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state judgment value (the judgment random number is the special state judgment value is a value within the numerical range of ), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value, The special state determination means can determine whether or not to control to a special state only by specifying the value of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the second reference value according to the fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A plurality of set values including advantageous set values and unfavorable set values with different probabilities of being controlled to at least the advantageous state (for example, from 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, to the most advantageous set value for the player). A setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) that can be set to any setting value among the values up to a certain 6);
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
The advantageous state determination value is a common first common numerical value range (for example, a range of 1020 to 1237) that is common among the plurality of stages of set values that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical range. numeric range) is set at least, and
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous set value is a non-common numerical range (for example, 1238 to each set It is set including a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to the value according to the value (2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The first common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, when the set value is 2, 1020 is the big hit reference value The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 9-55 And as shown in FIG. 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. part),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a second common numerical range that is continuous from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical value In the range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094 part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421 if the variable special pattern is the second special pattern)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The gaming machine of means 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 19,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) capable of controlling an advantageous state (e.g., big win game state) advantageous to a player and a special state (e.g., small win game state) more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. and
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 changes the set value shown in the part that performs the processing) and
Judgment random number generation means (for example, random number circuit 104 and game control counter setting unit that can generate a judgment random number for judging whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 207SG154) and
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the advantageous state judgment value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the advantageous state Advantageous state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Based on the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generation means and the special state judgment value corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means, whether or not to control to the special state Special state determination means for determining the (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41),
Controllable to the advantageous state based on the determination by the advantageous state determining means to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the determination by the special state determining means to control to the special state Controllable game control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5),
with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values differs depending on the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-20, the set set value Part where the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state differs due to the number of big hit judgment values differing according to),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical range, a first common numerical range common to each set value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical range of jackpot determination values in the range of 1020 to 1237) and a non-common numerical value range (for example, a range from 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (all values 1 to 6) that is different for each set value that can be set by the setting means. numeric range) and
The common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. The part where the range from 1020 to 1253, which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, is set as a continuous numerical range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a continuous numerical range from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, FIGS. 9-55 and As shown in 9-56, when the set value is 2 to 6, with 60000 as the reference value, the range from 60000 to the value according to the set value is set in the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value ),
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, the special state determination value is set in a range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical range from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value , In a range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, regardless of the set value, if the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set in the range of 32767 to 33094 If the fluctuation special pattern is the second special pattern, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and the processing load to determine whether to control to the special state. Especially in the present invention, since it is determined whether or not to control to the special state based on the numerical range of the same small hit determination value, the processing load for determining whether to control to the special state can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether or not to control to the special state.

The present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention, or may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table B, and (C) is an explanation showing a small win variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows a receiving command buffer at the time of dynamic winning. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of a display pattern of a pre-reading advance notice effect; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing production patterns of big hit suggestive effects and set suggestive effects to be executed as suggestive effects during rear variable display. be. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a big hit suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of setting suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing suggestive effect determination processing during front variable display; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the performance to be executed as the front variable display suggesting performance when execution of the big hit suggesting performance is determined, and (B) is a diagram showing the execution of the set suggesting performance is determined. (C) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the character effect and the timer effect executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, (D) is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit of the character effect and the timer effect and the degree of execution expectation of the setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a diagram. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation execution period in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing high-base middle variable display suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio of the effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect contents of each effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows special reach production|presentation pattern determination processing. It is the figure which shows the determination ratio of the production|presentation pattern of a special ready-to-win production, and the figure which shows the content of the production|presentation of each production|presentation pattern. (A) is a timing chart in the case of executing a variable display in the high base state with the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β to achieve a big hit, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ in the high base state. (C) is a diagram showing the ratio of the timing at which the variable probability big hit B is announced in the variable display in the high base state. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. (A) is a timing chart of the ending effect at the end of the big win game of the variable probability big win A, and (B) is a timing chart of the ending effect at the end of the big win game of the variable probability big win B. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the big-hit game of the big-hit A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in the big-hit game of the big-hit B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in variable display of super reach in a high base state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect in variable display of super reach in a high base state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing execution determination ratios and execution expectations of setting suggestion effects as suggestive effects during front variable display of character effects and timer effects in a modification; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of a pending memory display and effect images in a modified example; It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion production|presentation by the variable display of normal reach in a modification, non-shortening non-reach, and shortening non-reach. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a special design display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st suspension indicator and a 2nd suspension indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big win variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a start winning command buffer. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of display contents. 4 is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining changes in display contents of a display monitor; It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) is a diagram showing the display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormal error or recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a diagram. (A) is a diagram showing changes in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the holding display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display during the setting change process, and (B) is when a set value abnormal error occurs, or It shows a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when the power is restored during the setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state; It is an explanatory diagram showing an initial pattern for each received command. It is an explanatory diagram showing a notification mode when the pachinko game machine is started. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an operation example of non-detection operation control and actual operation confirmation operation control; FIG. 7 is a diagram showing operation speeds in operations of non-detection operation control and operation control for actual operation confirmation; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the end timing of setting value change and setting value confirmation and the number of executions of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing power failure detection processing; It is a flow chart which shows a part of production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. 10 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the characteristic portion 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop start process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop completion|finish process in the characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the production|presentation control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 40F. It is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic portion 40F. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a low probability state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table referred to in a high probability state; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability / low base state, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability / high base state (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the pending display and the active display in the high-probability/high-base state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow regarding each production mode. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the fluctuation pattern determination table referred to in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], and (B) is an explanation showing the fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to in the first period [final fluctuation] FIG. 8C is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table referred to in the second period; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the special figure 1 jackpot gaming state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination process at the time of a fluctuation start. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not a cut-in advance notice effect is to be executed, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a second setting suggestion effect. is an explanatory diagram showing an execution/non-execution decision table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode regarding the first setting suggestive effect in the first period, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the first setting suggestive effect in the second period. be. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding a second setting suggestion presentation; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding continuous challenge production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

In addition, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is in the ON state, the big winning gate door opens the big winning gate, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big winning gate. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern winning pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol varies depending on the type of the big hit to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "lost".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is a "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a big hit combination ("no reach"). ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that designates the game state before the power cut that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that designates the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting prize determination process, the process of detecting the occurrence of the starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution count, and a jackpot gaming state when the upper limit execution count is reached. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 179SG)
Next, the game machine in the characteristic part 179SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-46.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 179SG001a formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (frame) 179SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 179SG003, a glass door frame 179SG003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 179SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 179SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 179SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 179SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 179SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the batted ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 179SG002R is the left game area 179SG002L by the operation of the batted ball operation handle 30. This is the game area in which a game ball that is hit harder (right-handed) than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 179SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 179SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 179SG002R includes a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general game area 179SG002R from upstream to downstream of the right game area 179SG002R. A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 179SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 8-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 179SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 179SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

In addition, a first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 179SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5 . In the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the reserved memory number (special figure reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

A movable body 179SG300 is provided above the image display device 5 . The movable body 170SG300 is driven by a movable body motor 179SG301 (see FIG. 8-2) connected to the effect control board 12 to drive the standby position shown in FIG. ) (see Figure 8-44).

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 179SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 179SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 179SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 179SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 179SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting-switching switch 179SG052, is accommodated in the substrate case 179SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting-switching switch 179SG052 are housed in the substrate case 179SG201. are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 179SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 179SG201.

Since the substrate case 179SG201 having the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting changeover switch 179SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 179SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 179SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 179SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 179SG051 is also a switch that can perform switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 179SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 179SG201. The display monitor 179SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and arranged on the upper part of the board case 179SG201. That is, the display monitor 179SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 179SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 179SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 179SG003 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the second 1st special symbol display device 179SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 179SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 179SG025A, second reservation display 179SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 179SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 179SG025C capable of displaying normal design reservation memory number, A round display 179SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) and jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 179SG002R. A game information display unit 179SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 179SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 179SG133 that lights up in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 179SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

Each of the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 179SG004A uses two types of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result is a big win in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 179SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 179SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B may overlap.

The first suspension indicator 179SG025A and the second suspension indicator 179SG025B each have four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 179SG025A and second pending display 179SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Each time the variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display device corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment). In the section 179SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is preferentially executed. It looks like For this reason, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 179SG025A is lit, and the second pending If the two LEDs on the left of the display 179SG25B are lit), after the second special figure pending memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory, the first special figure pending A variable display based on memory is performed.

Also, the round indicator 179SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 179SG131 lights up differs according to these jackpot types.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

FIG. 8-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 179SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fifth variable display result specifying command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, etc.) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read out, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the characteristic portion 179SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for judging the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the range shown in FIG. 8-5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

FIG. 8-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is performed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is performed. be. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach fluctuation patterns, four or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, as described above, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes high, so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Furthermore, in this characteristic portion 179SG, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation pattern of super reach γ is provided only when the variable display result is a big hit, and the special figure variation time is set to be the longest. there is

It should be noted that, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of the fluctuation pattern is first determined. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the variation content (performance content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special design) shown in -8 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special design) shown in Fig. 8-8 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

FIGS. 8-7A and 8-7B are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 0 to 65535 , and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small "Hits" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "Losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state varies depending on each setting value (for example, setting If the value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability of the jackpot in the variable state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state. The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable probability state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each set value is all set to be constant (for example, 5 times). good too.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is regarded as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or setting value. The probability of being determined to control to the game state is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, the first special figure display result in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state In the determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range of 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the setting value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are determined based on the hit determination value of 1020. The determination value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the big hit determination value, and regardless of the game state and the set value, the continuous numerical range of 1 based on the hit determination value of 32767 (common The variable display result is determined with the determination value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 179SG004A or the second special symbol display device 179SG004B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figure 8-8 (A) and Figure 8-8 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot B based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-9. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, a jackpot A and a jackpot B are set in which the time saving control and the high accuracy control are executed after the jackpot game state is ended and the high accuracy base state is shifted to. there is In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, a form is exemplified in which a big win A and a big win B (probability variable big win) drinking are set as the big win types, in which high accuracy control is always executed after the end of the big win game. is not limited to this, and as the jackpot type, a jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) in which high-precision control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game may be set.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which 7 rounds (so-called 7 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. B" is a normal open big win in which 16 rounds (so-called 16 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot A'' is that the special game is executed 100 times or the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed 100 times. end by The time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state by the ``jackpot B'' is that the special game is executed 150 times, or the big win game state is entered before the special game is executed 150 times. end by

In addition, the variable probability control executed after the end of the big win game state by "big win A" and the variable probability control executed after the end of the big win game state by "big win B" are executed 150 times of the special game. Alternatively, the game ends when a jackpot game state is reached before the 150th special game is executed.

That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG, the game state is first controlled to the high-probability-high base state after the end of the big-hit game state by the "big-hit A". Then, when the variable display result does not result in a big win during the 100 times of special figure games (100 times of variable display) in the high probability/high base state, the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state. In addition, when the variable display result does not become a big hit during 50 times of special figure games (50 times of variable display) in the low probability/high base state, the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state. On the other hand, after the end of the big win game state by the "big win B", first, the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state. Then, when the variable display result does not result in a big hit during 150 times of special figure games (150 times of variable display) in the high-probability-high base state, the game state is controlled to the low-probability-low base state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 199 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A. , and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 are assigned to the big hit A. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (game When the winning hole where the ball wins is the second starting winning hole, the ratio of determining the big win B as the big win type is set higher than when the winning hole where the game ball wins is the first starting winning hole. On the other hand, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table includes 1 to 50 special games in a high base state (up to 50 times in a high base state). Variation pattern determination table A for jackpot used except when the jackpot type is jackpot B in variable display), and 1 to 50 special game in high base state (variable display up to 50 times in high base state) A big hit variation pattern determination table B used when the big win type is the big win B is provided in advance, and these big hit variation pattern determination tables include normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1-1), Variation pattern judgment for each variation pattern of Super Reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), Super Reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), Super Reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4) A predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 can take is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 1 to 200 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are normal reach big hit variation patterns (PB1-1) 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). .

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are super reach γ jackpot variation patterns (PB1-4 ). That is, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special game variation time is always the longest. It is set so that the variable display is executed in the long super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PB1-4).

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special game variation time is always the longest. Although a form in which variable display is executed in a long super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a high base state 1 to 50 times of special display is shown. Even if the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the game shown in the figure (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the normal reach variation pattern (PB1 -1), variation pattern of super reach α (PB1-2), and variation pattern of super reach β (PB1-3). Furthermore, even if the jackpot type is a jackpot B in the special game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the variation pattern of super reach γ (PB1-4 ) to execute variable display.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are small hit variation patterns ( PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2 or more are provided as a small hit variation pattern. may be provided.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a judgment value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), 1 to 450 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending memories in low base), 1 to Up to 500 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 is super reach α. , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of Super Reach β.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 5 to 8 (PA1-3), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more total pending memories in low base), 1 to 550 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α out of It is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation.

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern (PA1-4) of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control, the variation pattern of the deviation of the normal reach (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the deviation of the super reach α (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (high base medium), out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are non-reach deviation fluctuations It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2-2) , and 901 to 997 are assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β.

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is set higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern. Also, when using the variation pattern determination table A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the determination values are super reach α deviation variation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviation, regardless of the variation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so the variable display by the variation pattern of super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from decreasing.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between each set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is lost, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach is the same, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is not a thing, the determination ratio of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and any variation between non-reach and normal reach Only the determining proportions of the patterns may be identical.

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the form of determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect for each determined variation pattern and which ready-to-win effect to execute are associated one-to-one. , The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the reach production based on the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach production is executed It may be determined by lottery.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the characteristic portion 179SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12(A), the display monitor 179SG029 has a first display section 179SG029A, a second display section 179SG029B, a third display section 179SG029C, and a fourth display section 179SG029D. Each of the first display portion 179SG029A to the fifth display portion 179SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 179SG029A to fifth display section 179SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 179SG029 in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 179SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all gaming states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed in percentage on display monitor 179SG029.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 179SG029, the first display section 179SG029A displays "b" and the second display section 179SG029B displays "L." ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. When displaying base 2 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D. In addition, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 179SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display portion 179SG029C and the fourth display portion 179SG029D.

In the display monitor 179SG029 of the present embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, the main substrate 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in white, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in white. If it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in blue, and if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in green, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in green. 5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 179SG029, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "6", each base value in the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 179SG029, without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 179SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 179SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes a production control flag setting unit 179SG191, a production control timer setting unit 179SG192, a production control counter setting unit 179SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 179SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 179SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 179SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the characterizing section 179SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A as shown in FIG. In the startup winning command buffer 179SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning command buffer 179SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative design variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 8-21) described later is secured for each storage area (entry).

The pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when the execution of the pending display announcement effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later. By doing so, the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 179SG005D and the second suspension memory display area 179SG005U, and when the execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star ( ☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red camera) by setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display, is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U. The possibility of a ready-to-win situation and the high possibility of execution of a setting suggestion performance suggesting the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are announced.

At the time of start winning to the first start winning opening, the effect control CPU 120 stores the command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning command buffer 179SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 179SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage or the second special figure reservation storage, start opening winning designation command , symbol designating command, variation category designating command, and pending storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (179SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (179SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (179SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (179SGSa004; N), proceed to 179SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (179SGSa003; Y, 179SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (179SGSa005).

If the set value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; N), proceed to 179SGSa017, and if the set value stored in RAM 102 is one of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (179SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (179SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described below has been executed If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (179SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (179SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (179SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 179SGSa011 (179SGSa010). move on.

At 179SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011). If the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa012). When the open sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 179SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened (179SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (179SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (179SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 179SGSa013d, RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation processing (179SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (179SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the currently set set value on the display monitor 179SG029. Next, every time the setting switch 179SG052 is operated, the setting values are updated and displayed on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, when the lock switch 179SG051 is turned off, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 is designated by specifying the setting value. A command is output to the effect control CPU 120 .

Also, in the set value confirmation process (179SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the currently set set values on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, when the lock switch 179SG051 is turned off, the display of the set values on the display monitor 179SG029 may be ended.

If the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF at 179SGSa011 (179SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (179SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d without executing the processes of 179SGSa013a to 179SGSa013c.

In 179SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started (RAM clear processing (179SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 179SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 179SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) without executing, go to 179SGSa014.

In the RAM clearing process (179SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes the process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the setting value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). . That is, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGSa001 to 179SGSa013e and 179SGSa017 to 179SGSa021 described later, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address where the setting value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except addresses that are

At 179SGSa014, the CPU 103 again determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa014; Y), proceed to 179SGSa022; (179SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (activated by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 179SGSa028. (179SGSa016).

In addition, at 179SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (179SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (179SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa019).

When the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened, the lock switch 179SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (179SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (179SGSa021). Then, the processes 179SGSa009 to 179SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (179SGSa017; N), the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF (179SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 179SG090 is OFF (179SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa031.

Further, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by cold start (179SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 (179SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029. (179SGSa024).

After executing 179SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (179SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (179SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (179SGSa026; N), the processing of 179SGSa025 and 179SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (179SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 179SG029 stops blinking (179SGSa027) and proceeds to 179SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko game machine 1, only a part of all segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 may be blinked. Alternatively, at least some of all the segments forming the display monitor 179SG029 may be illuminated.

Then, in 179SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (179SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (179SGSa029), and the interrupt is enabled (179SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 179SGSa031, the CPU 103 stores an abnormal set value in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), based on the recovery from the power interruption during setting change described later, etc., to the effect control board 12 Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (179SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (179SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (179SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (179SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (179SGSa034; N), the processing of 179SGSa033 and 179SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (179SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 179SG029A, the second display 179SG029B, the third display 179SG029C, and the fourth display 179SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 179SG029, as notification (error notification) of the recovery from the power failure during the occurrence of a change or setting change. 'E.' is displayed (179SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B (179SGSa036), and the game is played through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa032 (179SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 179SGSa032 to 179SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), thereby displaying the display monitor 179SG029. , the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 179SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the staff at the game hall can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (179SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 179SGSa008 (179SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 179SGSa014 (179SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flow chart showing the start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (179SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (179SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (179SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation memory. 179SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (179SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (179SGS103 ).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 179SGS101 (179SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 179SGS102 (179SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (179SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (179SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (179SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 179SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (179SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (179SGS106 ).

After executing either of the processes of 179SGS103 and 179SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (179SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (179SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 179SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data representing a random number value MR2 for use and a random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (179SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (179SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start buffer value is "2" , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the result of the variable display is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 179SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 179SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (179SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

Following the processing of 179SGS111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (179SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (179SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the processing of 179SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (179SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 179SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (179SGS115), and then the processing of 179SGS104 is performed. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 179SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 179SGS 112 in FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number determination process. In the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is started, the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 5) changes the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to " It is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as the special figure display result as "small hit", and the like. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of 179SGS112. By, determination of whether or not to derive and display the big hit pattern as a special figure display result, determination of whether or not to derive and display the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, variable display mode of the decorative pattern determines whether or not is in a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pending display forewarning effect, as will be described later.

In the random number value determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit not shown, for example. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (179SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 179SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (179SGS122). At this time, if the starting buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7(A), and if the starting buffer value is 2, FIG. The second special figure display result determination table shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the jackpot numerical range (jackpot judgment range) according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result judgment table, the special figure extracted at 179SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for display result determination is within the jackpot determination range (179SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by performing point-by-point comparison. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 179SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that there is no jackpot at the time of variable display (179SGS123; N), it is further set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 179SGS109 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (179SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each judgment value It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the small hit determination range, the CPU 103 generates the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the small hit determination range It is sufficient if it can be determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "small hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range at 179SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it does not become a small hit at the time of variable display (179SGS124; N), the variable display result is "miss". (179SGS125), and determines whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current game state is the time saving state (179SGS126). If the time saving flag is not set (179SGS126; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (179SGS127), and if the time saving flag is set (179SGS126; Y), the variation pattern for loss The judgment table D is selected and set (179SGS128).

Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is one or less, as shown in FIG. 8-11(A). In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is, as shown in FIG. be.

Incidentally, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, in addition to these deviation variation pattern determination table A and deviation variation pattern determination table D, deviations that are used when the total number of pending memories are 2 to 4 A variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of pending memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss, a value from 0 to 450 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of super reach within the range of possible random number values MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 179SGS137, which will be described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern of non-reach or super reach, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when 179SGS123 is determined to be within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot at the time of variable display (179SGS123; Y), jackpot type determination Based on the random number MR2 for use, the type of jackpot is determined (179SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in 179SGS130 is executed (179SG131), whether or not the time saving flag is set, and whether the suspension memory is the second special figure suspension memory (179SGS132, 179SGS133). It should be noted that whether or not the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure may be determined by the starting port buffer value set in the processing of 179SGS103 or 179SGS106. If the time saving flag is set and the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure (179SGS132; Y and 179SGS133; Y), the variable display of the pending memory is also variable within the 50th time of the high base state It is determined whether or not to display (179SGS134). Whether or not the variable display is within the 50th time in the high base state is the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter described later and the number of pending memories in the second special figure pending storage unit. It should be judged by whether.

For example, if the pending storage is the first pending storage in the second special figure pending storage unit, whether the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less If the pending memory is the second pending memory in the second special figure pending storage unit, the value obtained by adding 2 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less Determining whether or not, if the pending memory is the third pending memory in the second special figure pending storage unit, the value obtained by adding 3 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" or less Determining whether or not there is, if the suspension storage is the fourth suspension storage in the second special figure suspension storage unit, the value obtained by adding 4 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50" It suffices to determine whether or not:

When the variable display of the reserved memory is within the 50th variable display in the high base state (179SGS134; Y), the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table for determining the big hit variation pattern. (179SG135).

Also, if the time saving flag is not set (179SGS132; N), etc. If the pending memory is the pending memory of the second special figure (179SGS133; N), the variable display of the pending memory is the 51st time in the high base state In the case of subsequent variable display (179SGS134; N), a big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining a big hit variation pattern (179SGS136).

In addition, when it is determined that it is within the small hit determination range at 179SGS124, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (179SGS124; Y), the transmission of the symbol designation command according to the small hit type Along with executing the setting (179SGS129a), as a table for judging a small hit variation pattern, a small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (179SGS129b).

After executing any of the processes of 179SGS127, 179SGS128, 179SGS129b, 179SGS135, and 179SGS136, a random number MR3 is included using the set fluctuation pattern determination table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. 179SGS137 determines the variation category according to the range of the determined values. In the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A variable category that becomes a variable display mode, a variable category that becomes a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not the variation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 179SGS137 to the effect control board 12 (179SGS138), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 8-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the CPU 103 first sets a time saving state variable display count counter indicating the number of special game (variable display) times after being controlled to the high base state (time saving state). (179SGS141). It should be noted that the fact that the time saving state variable display number counter is set means that any numerical value including 0 is set in the time saving state variable display number counter. When the time saving state variable display number counter is set (179SGS141; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to 179SGS143 (179SGS142). In addition, when the time saving state variable display frequency counter is not set (179SGS141; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS143 without executing the process of 179SGS142.

In 179SGS143, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is set. Then, if the jackpot flag is set (179SGS143; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144). If the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144; Y), it further determines whether the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any one of 1 to 50, that is, the variable display to be executed is controlled to a high base state. It is determined whether or not it is the 1st to 50th variable display (179SGS145). If the value of the time-saving state variable display frequency counter is any one of 1 to 50 (179SGS145; Y), select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table B as the table used for determining the big hit variation pattern. (179SGS146), go to 179SGS155.

In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot A (179SGS144) or when the value of the time saving state variable display number counter is 51 or more (179SGS145; N), the jackpot variation is used as a table used for determining the jackpot variation pattern. The pattern determination table A is selected and set (179SGS147), and the process proceeds to 179SGS155.

When the jackpot flag is not set at 179SGS143 (179SGS143; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, thereby determining whether or not time saving control is being performed (179SGS148). Then, if the time saving flag is set (179SGS148; Y), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, and proceed to 179SGS155 (179 SGS149).

On the other hand, if the time saving flag is not set (179SGS148; N), the total number of reserved memories is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (179SGS150).

When the specified total reserved storage number is 1 or less (179SGS150; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss as a table used for determining one of the plurality of types of variation patterns. , 179SGS155 (179SGS151).

Also, if the identified total number of reserved memories is 2 or more (179SGS150; Y), it is further determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories is 5 or more (159SGS152).

If the total number of reserved memories is not 5 or more (179SGS152; N), select and set the deviation pattern determination table B as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, and set it to 179SGS155. Proceed (179SGS153).

In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is 5 or more (179SGS152; Y), as a table to be used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns, the variation pattern determination table C for failure is selected and set. , 179SGS155 (179SGS154).

Then, in 179SGS155, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table for the big hit or the variation pattern determination table for the loss based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the random number buffer for variation, for example. By referring to, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types.

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of 179SGS155. In other words, the process of 179SGS155 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in 179SGS155, according to the variable display special figure designation buffer value, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Setting for starting variable display of special symbols is performed so as to start one of the special symbols games using the second special symbol (179SGS156). As an example, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of 179SGS156, settings are made for transmitting various commands for starting variable display of special symbols (179SGS157). For example, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first fluctuation start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, etc., the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable display start command table prepared in advance is stored in the transmission command buffer. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in . On the other hand, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable In order to sequentially transmit the display result designation command and the second pending storage count notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer designated by the transmission command pointer. Store in the area.

After executing the process of 179SGS157, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (179SGS158). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (179SGS159), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in 179SGS157, every time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. , the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

As described above, in this characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern determination table B for the big win is always selected. is determined as the super reach γ variation pattern, and if the variable display result is a big hit B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, the variation pattern is always selected by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table A. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big win variation pattern determination table B. However, if the variable display result is a jackpot A in the variable display after the 1st to 50th times in the high base state, by selecting the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is always changed to the super reach γ variation pattern. decide.

FIG. 8-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S112 to terminate the variable display of the special symbols, and displays the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (179SGS181). In addition, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the variable display of the first special figure in the first special design display device 4A is terminated, and the variable display special figure designation is made. When the buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (179SGS182). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (179SGS183), and when the big hit flag is not set (179SGS183; N), the process moves to 179SGS191.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (179SGS183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the variable probability flag and the short time flag if the variable probability flag and the short time flag are set (179SGS184). Moreover, if the time saving state variable display number counter is set, the time saving state variable display number counter is also cleared (179SGS185). Then, the performance control board 12 is set to transmit a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the stored jackpot type (179SGS186).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (179SGS187).

Then, a value corresponding to the big win display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win in the image display device 5) is set in the big win display time timer (179SGS188). Also, the number of opening times (for example, 7 times for big win A, 16 times for big win B) is set in the big winning opening opening times counter (179SGS189). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S114) (179SGS190).

On the other hand, in S191, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (179SGS191; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGS194.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (179SGS191; N), that is, if it is in a high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (179SGS192) . Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (179SGS193), and if it is not "0" (179SGS193; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS195, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" ' (179SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared to end the time saving control (179SGSS194), and the process proceeds to 179SGS195.

In 179SGS195, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". If the value of the probability variable number counter is "0" (179SGS195; N), proceed to 179SGS199.

Then, in 179SG199, the CPU 103 is a game state corresponding to the set state of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag (when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are set, only the high probability high base state and the probability variable flag are set In this case, the transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state, and the low probability low base state when both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are not set) is performed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (179SGS200).

FIG. 8-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (179SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (179SGS201; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS202). When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot A (170SGS202:;N), the jackpot end display timer is set to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the ending effect, which will be described later, is performed as the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. A value corresponding to the corresponding first display time is set (179SGSS203), and the process ends. In addition, when the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (170SGS202:;Y), the jackpot end display timer is set to the time (jackpot end display time ) is set (179SGSS204), and the process ends. Note that the second display time is longer than the first display time described above. In other words, the characteristic portion 179SG is set so that after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is finished, the ending effect, which will be described later, can be executed for a longer period of time than after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is finished. Note that the first display period in this characteristic portion 179SG is, for example, 20 seconds, and the second display period is, for example, 45 seconds.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (179SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (179SGS205). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (179SGS206). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (179SGS206; Y), the CPU 103 sets both the time saving flag and the probability variation flag (179SGS207, 179SGS208), and the number of special game times controlled to the probability variation number counter in the probability variation state. (variable display count) is set to "150" (179SGS209). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot B (179SGS210). When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is the jackpot A (179SGS210; N), the number of times of the special game (variable display number) controlled to the time-saving state is set to 179SGS213 in the time-saving number counter. Proceed (179SGS211), if the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS210; Y), the time-saving number counter is controlled to the time-saving state (variable display number) "150" which is the number of special games. Set and go to 179SGS213 (179SGS212).

In 179SGS213, CPU103 sets "0" to the time-saving state variable display execution frequency counter. Then, the jackpot flag is cleared (179SGS214), and transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (179SGS215). Then, after performing the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability variation flag and the time saving flag (179SGS216), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to , and the jackpot ending process is terminated (179SGS217).

FIG. 8-20 is part of a flow chart of the effect control process (S76) in the characterizing part 179SG of this embodiment. In the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, after the execution of the pre-reading notice setting processing (S161) shown in FIG. After executing the pending display update process (179SGS162) for updating the display mode and the number of display of the pending storage display according to the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) S170 to S177 shown in FIG. It is designed to execute one of the processes.

FIG. 8-21 is a flow chart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. (179SGS242). If there is no entry for which the pending display flag is not set, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. It is determined whether or not there is an entry that has been set (179SGS243).

If there is an entry with the value of the pending display flag set to any one of 1 to 4, that is, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed, the pending display flag is set in the entry (179SGS242 "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is set to the pending display flag of the entry determined as not being executed (that is, it is decided to display the pending memory display corresponding to the entry with "○"). to end the advance notice setting process (179SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry whose value of the pending display flag is already set to any one of 1 to 4 means that the pending display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 179SGS243, when the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, execution of a new pending display foretelling effect is restricted.

In 179SGS243, if there is no entry set to any of the values 1 to 4 of the pending display flag, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined that the pending display flag is not set in 179SGS242 ) indicates a big hit (179SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a big hit, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (179SGS245), and extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the production control counter setting unit 179SG193, for example. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 179SGS245, by referring to a jackpot time pending display notice effect determination table (not shown), whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the hold display. A display pattern in the case of executing the advance notice effect is determined (179SGS246).

In the 179SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-22(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of 179SGS245, the presence or absence of the pending display notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are changed.

In the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (preview types) of the pending display pre-notice effect are provided: the display pattern α, the display pattern β, the display pattern γ, and the display pattern δ. Among these, when the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U. When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U with a white star (☆). When the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U with the blue camera, and the pending display is performed. When the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U with the red camera. Further, when non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, the pending memory display is displayed in a white circle (○) in the first pending memory display area 179SG005D or the second pending memory display area 179SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 55%. , the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined, the execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%. is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot), non-execution of pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and pending display notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 55%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 10% Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 179SGS244, when the symbol designation command of the entry is a loss or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation category from the variation category designation command of the entry (179SGS248), for example, the random number circuit 124 and effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pending display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 179SG193 and the jackpot type specified in 179SGS249, a small hit/losing hold display notice effect determination table (not shown) is referred to. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22(B), when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%, Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display forecast effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the pending display notice effect is determined, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a loss or a small hit and the variation category is other (normal reach is a loss or a small hit), the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and 20%. Execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 5%, and a pending display notice in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of the effect is determined, and execution of the pending display forewarning effect with the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pending display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is determined, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pending display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of 5%. Execution of the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-22(A) and 8-22(B), in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display notice effect is executed, when the pending display notice effect is not executed In addition to being controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than, when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, than when the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α The jackpot type is set to be the jackpot B or the jackpot C (probability variable jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the probability variable big hit, and the player's expectation for the probability variable big win can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for being controlled to the big win gaming state than the display pattern α and the display pattern β. is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability-variable degree of expectation for big win) for the type of big win to be big win B or big win C is the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, the variation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is a loss and the variation category is super reach. In other words, the pending memory display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (blue and red camera aspects) also suggests that it is a super reach variable display capable of executing a setting suggestion effect, which will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), when the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach , the pending memory display is never displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect is determined after executing the processing of 179SGS246 or 179SGS249 (179SGS250). When execution of pending display notice effect is determined, a value (one of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the process of 179SGS246 or 179SGS249 is set in the pending display flag of the entry to read ahead. The advance notice setting process is terminated (179SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the pending display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 179SGS251).

8-23 and 8-24 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set (179SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning time reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the first to fourth first special symbol reserved storage corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (179SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 179SGS271 (179SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (179SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags (that is, variable display Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol reserved storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (179 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing 179SGS272 or 179SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (179SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (179SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that three symbols are even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. A combination of matching decorative patterns (big hit pattern) is determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the big hit B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333", "555", "999", etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specifying command is the fourth variable display result specifying command corresponding to the jackpot C, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop pattern. do. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop pattern is a chance eye (3 ("334", "556", "778", etc.) are determined. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

And the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is a low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) (179SGS276a). When the gaming state is the low base state (179SGS276a; Y), it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the super reach variation pattern (179SGS277). If the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of super reach, proceed to 179SGS285, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach, suggesting effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect of the variable display. and which effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable rear display is executed (179SGS278). That is, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGS277 to 179SG278, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display (jackpot suggestive effect and setting suggestive effect) is the variation of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only in the display, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In addition, in the super reach variable display in the low base state in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. A character performance suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 that the result will be a big hit, or a timer performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big win and suggesting a period until execution of the suggested performance during the rear variable display is started. A jackpot suggestive effect or a setting set in the pachinko game machine 1 which is executable and suggests that the variable display result will be a big win as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the ready-to-win performance which is the latter half of the variable display. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a value. That is, the process of 179SGS278 is the process of determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and which of the big win suggestive effect and the set suggestive effect to be executed during the ready-to-win effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. .

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display (either the big hit suggestive effect or the set suggestive effect) has been determined in the process of 179SGS278 (179SGS279). If it is determined in the process of 179SGS278 that the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is not to be executed, the process proceeds to 179SGS285. A front part variable display suggestive effect determination process for determining which of the character effect and timer effect is to be executed as the suggestive effect during variable display is executed (179SGS280). That is, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the front variable display suggestive effect is not determined unless execution of the rear variable display effect is determined. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, timer effects and character effects are not executed as suggestive effects during front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the character effect has been determined as the suggestive effect during front variable display (179SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is set to the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the variable rear display (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A)). After 5 seconds from the start of the ready-to-win effect), proceed to 179SG285 (179SGS282), and if execution of the timer effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is determined, wait for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display on the timer (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), the value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is 25 seconds 5 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern TS-1 is the period, and 10 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect if the pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2 that is the effect period of 30 seconds) ) and proceed to 179SGS285 (179SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern in 179SGS285. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (179SGS286).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (179SGS287). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing section 179SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (179SGS288). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (179SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (179SGS290).

In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state is a high base state (high probability high base state) in the processing of 179SGS276a (179SGS276a; N), the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern is a super reach γ variation pattern. (179SGS291). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern other than the super reach γ (179SGS291; N), the high base medium for determining whether or not to execute the high base medium variable display suggestive effect and the effect pattern of the high base medium variable display suggestive effect. After executing the variable display suggestion effect determination process (179SGS292), the processes of 179SGS285 to 179SGS290 are executed, and the variable display start setting process ends.

In addition, when the variation pattern is the super reach γ variation pattern (179SGS291; Y), a special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS293) for determining the effect pattern of the all-rotation reach effect as the special reach effect to be executed after reach is executed. Along with executing, after selecting the process table corresponding to the special reach effect pattern determined in the special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS294), the processes of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290 are executed to end the variable display start setting process. .

FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during rear variable display (179SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. (179SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the pending display flag of the entry "1-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A is specified, and the second variable display start command reception flag is set. If the display start command reception flag is set, the entry "2-0" in the start winning reception command buffer 179SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display and the effect to be executed as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display based on the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SG301 (179SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26(A), when the value of the pending display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "0", that is, the pending display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the ratio determines non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, 10% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, and 0% of the ratio determines the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during variable display. Also, if the value of the pending display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. If it is, the non-execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestive effect as the suggestive effect during the variable rear display is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a rate of 0%. Execution of setting suggesting effect is determined as suggesting effect during rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "3", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 30 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%, and determines the execution of the suggestive performance during the variable rear display at the ratio of 35%. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect. Then, if the value of the reserved display flag specified in 179SGS301 is "4", that is, if the reserved memory display is displayed by the red camera as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, 0 % determines non-execution of the suggestive performance during the rear variable display, 30% determines the execution of the jackpot suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display, and 70% determines the performance as the suggestive performance during the variable rear display. Determines execution of the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending display forewarning effect is executed for the variable display, it is more likely than when the pending display forecast effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Furthermore, when the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"), Higher than when the pending memory display is displayed in a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "1" or "2") It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined by a ratio, and the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that execution of the setting suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than in the case.

Also, attention is paid to the case where the pending memory display is displayed with a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the pending display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it was displayed as a camera, and the pending memory display is a blue camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the set suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in .

From the above, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed in a square or star shape as the reserved display notice effect for the variable display, the suggested effect during the rear variable display While it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the big hit suggestive effect is executed, the pending memory display is displayed by a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect for the variable display. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the pending memory display is displayed on the red camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display, the pending memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the pending display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is higher than in the case where it is displayed as a rear variable display, the game is more concerned with whether the setting suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. It is designed to attract people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during rear variable display has been determined in the process of 179SGS302 (179SGS303). If it is determined in the process of 179SGS302 that the suggestive effect during variable rear display is not to be executed, then the process of determining suggestive effect during variable rear display is terminated. , 179SGS302, it is determined whether or not execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as a suggestive effect during rear variable display (179SGS304).

In the processing of 179SGS302, when it is determined to execute a big hit suggestive effect as a suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the performance pattern of the big hit suggestive effect is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive effect determination process during the rear variable display is performed. End (179SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 8-26(B), three effect patterns, pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3, are provided as effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 179SGS305. Of these production patterns, pattern AS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is: This is a production pattern (expectation for big win: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to the big win. This is a production pattern that suggests high (big hit expectation: high).

Then, in the processing of 179SGS305 described above, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the variable display result is a big hit, the production control CPU 120 sets the production pattern of the big hit suggestion production at a rate of 10% to the pattern AS-1. , pattern AS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, in the process of 179SGS302, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and refers to the setting value specified command received from the CPU 103 (Pachinko game machine 1 (179SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestive effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestive effect determination processing during rear variable display (179SGS307).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-26(B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided as determinable effect patterns in 179SG307. Among these patterns SS-1 to SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests the possibility that the set value is an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 suggests the possibility that the set value is an even number ( For example, 2, 4, 6), pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the setting value is an odd-numbered intermediate setting or higher (for example, 3 or 5), pattern SS-4 indicates that the setting value may be an even intermediate setting or higher (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the setting value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

Patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any one of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value is either 5 or 6 (high setting). It is assumed that the degree of expectation of being either is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5, It is said that expectations for being 6 are high.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the setting values 1 to 4 are set to be low, and the setting values 5 and 6 are to be high. Alternatively, setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, setting values 3 and 4 may be medium settings, and setting values 5 and 6 may be high settings, and the performance pattern execution ratio may be set.

In the processing of 179SGS307 described above, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern to the pattern SS- at a rate of 60% as shown in FIG. 8-28. 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 25%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, and 6 The pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 9%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%. SS-3 is determined at a rate of 10%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 20%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, the production pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and determined to be pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%. %, pattern SS-3 is determined, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the pattern SS-1 is determined as the production pattern at a rate of 30%, the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 15 %, the pattern SS-3 is determined, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of 30%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 5%.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG, the setting value suggestion effect is executed in patterns SS-1 and SS-2 to suggest that the setting value is any one of 1 to 4. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, the set value of 6 is determined.

FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect determination process during front variable display (179SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (179SGS311). Also, it is determined whether or not execution of the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during rear variable display has been determined (179SGS312).

When the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance is determined as the rear variable display suggestion performance, whether or not to execute the front variable display suggestion performance and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion performance and the variable display result The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(A), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and at a rate of 30%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 30%. Also, if the result of the variable display is a failure, 70% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 25% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Execution of the timer effect is determined at a rate of 5% as the suggestive effect during the variable display of the front part.

In other words, in the case where the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. Execution of suggestive performance is determined, and when the result of variable display is a big win, execution of character performance and execution of timer performance are determined at the same rate as suggestive performance during front variable display, while variable display result. In the case of a failure, execution of the character performance is determined at a higher rate than execution of the timer performance as a suggestive performance during the front variable display. is set.

In addition, when execution of the set suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect and the suggesting effect during the front variable display based on the result of the variable display. The effect to be executed as the presence/absence and suggestive effect during front variable display is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and at a rate of 0%. determines execution of a character performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display, and determines execution of a timer performance as a suggestive performance during front variable display at a rate of 70%. In addition, when the result of the variable display is a failure, 80% of the decisions are made to not execute the suggestive effect during the variable front display, and 0% of the decisions are made to execute the character effect as the suggestive effect during the variable front display. Then, execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display at a rate of 20%.

In other words, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss. It is set so that the execution of the suggestive effect is determined and the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display is not determined regardless of whether the result of the variable display is a big win or a loss. That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the timer effect is set higher than the degree of expectation for a big win in the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a loss, so it is suggested during the front variable display. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big win.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-29, after executing 179SGS313 or 179SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the suggestive effect during front variable display is determined (179SGS315). When it is decided not to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the process of deciding the suggestive effect during the variable front display is terminated, and when the execution of the suggestive effect during the variable front display is determined, the front is further processed. It is determined whether or not execution of a character presentation has been decided as a suggestive presentation during variable display (179SGS316).

When it is determined to execute a character presentation as a suggestive presentation during front variable display, the presentation pattern of the character presentation is determined and stored based on the result of the variable display, and the suggestive presentation determination processing during variable front display is terminated. (179 SGS317).

Incidentally, as the effect pattern of the character effect that can be determined in the processing of 179SGS317, as shown in FIG. . Of these production patterns, pattern CS-1 is a production pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the variable display result by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 has the lowest probability of winning a big hit. Pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying a character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 (expectation for big win: medium ).

For this reason, in the processing of 179SGS317, as shown in FIG. , and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the pattern CS-1 is determined as the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 80%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. is determined and stored, and the suggestive effect determination process during variable part display ends (179SGS318).

As the effect pattern of the timer effect that can be determined in the processing of 179SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-30(C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big hit in image display device 5 is higher than pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of character effects (expectation for big win: high). ) together with the pattern TS-2 indicates the period until the start of execution of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, together with the image of the character X, for 25 seconds. is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character production (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the rear variable display suggestive production is started with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds. (See Figures 8-31(C), 8-40(D) and 8-40(E)).

Therefore, in the processing of 179SGS318, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 80% of the time, and pattern TS-2 20% of the time. In addition, when the suggestive effect during rear variable display whose execution has been determined is the set suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer In the case where the performance period of the performance is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A, the ratio of executing the set suggestive performance as the suggestive performance during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5 . Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can expect the setting suggesting effect to be executed more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the game interest.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed as a suggestion, and the suggestion production is set as a suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as a suggestion production during the front variable display. A production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during variable display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines in the effect process during variable display (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestive effect during front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent effect process during variable display (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the suggestive effect during the rear variable display during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the timer for waiting for the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display by 1 each time the effect processing during the variable display is executed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the waiting timer for starting the suggestive effect during the rear variable display becomes 0, the process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the determined suggestive effect during the variable rear display is set. Then, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the effect process during variable display (S172).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), the jackpot suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display in this characteristic part 179SG are during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a longer period than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player looks away from the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the big win suggesting effect or the setting suggesting effect.

FIG. 8-33 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 179SGS291 of FIG. In the high base middle variable display suggestive effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (179SGS321), and determines whether or not to execute the high base medium variable display suggestive effect and the damage base medium variable display suggestive effect. The effect pattern of the effect is determined (179SGS322).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), when the variable display result is out and the variation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out), the high base at a rate of 100% Determines non-execution of medium variable display suggestive effect, decides to execute high base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern KS-1 at a rate of 0%, high base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern at a rate of 0% Execution in KS-2 is determined, and execution in pattern KS-3 of the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is normal reach (normal reach is lost), 50% of the time, it is decided not to execute the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect, and 40% of the time. Determine execution with pattern KS-1 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect, determine execution with pattern KS-2 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect at a rate of 10%, high base at a rate of 0% Execution is determined in pattern KS-3 of middle variable display suggestion effect.

In addition, if the variable display result is lost and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach is lost), it is determined at a rate of 30% not to execute the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect, and 30%. At a rate of 30%, the pattern KS-1 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is decided, and at a rate of 30%, the pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is decided, and at a rate of 0%. Execution in the pattern KS-3 of the high base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined.
In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, 10% of the decision is made not to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect, and 20% of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect pattern KS-1 is determined. Execution is decided, 60% of the time it is decided to execute pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect, and 10% of the time it is decided to execute pattern KS-3 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect. decide.

In addition, when the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the high-base middle variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the pattern KS-1 of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is determined at a rate of 0%. is determined to be executed, and at a rate of 0% it is decided to execute pattern KS-2 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect, and at a rate of 0% it is executed with pattern KS-3 of high base medium variable display suggestive effect. to decide.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-34(B), the pattern KS-1, which is the effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect, is applied when the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is not executed in the image display device 5. KS-2 is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "chance") indicating that the percentage of variable display results that result in a big win is higher (higher expectations for a big win) is displayed in blue. Pattern KS-2 is an image display. This is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "hot") is displayed in red, indicating that the ratio of the variable display result to the big win is higher (higher the expectation of the big win) in the device 5 than in the pattern KS-1. Pattern KS-3 is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "big win confirmed") is displayed in rainbow colors on the image display device 5 to notify that the result of the variable display is a big win.

In other words, as the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect in the present characteristic portion 179SG, the degree of expectation of the big hit differs depending on the content of the message displayed on the image display device 5 (the degree of expectation of the big hit for each message: "big hit confirmed">" “Hot” > “Chance”), and the color of these messages also changes the expectation of a big hit. In particular, displaying these messages in rainbow colors means that the variable display result always results in a big win (expectation for big win for each color of message: rainbow > red > blue).

Returning to FIG. 8-33, after executing the process of 179SGS322, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the high-base middle variable display suggestion effect has been determined (179SGS323). When it is decided to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect (179SGS323; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored and the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect decision processing is terminated (179SGS324), and the high-base medium variable display suggestive When it is decided not to execute the effect (179SGS323; N), the processing of 179SGS324 is not executed, and the high-base middle variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated.

When execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120, in the effect process during variable display (S172), stores process data according to the decided effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestive effect. After setting, the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer in the subsequent variable display process (S172).

FIG. 8-35 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 179SGS293 of FIG. 8-24 as special reach effect pattern determination processing. In the special ready-to-win effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies whether or not the special ready-to-win effect is being executed from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS331), and performs the special ready-to-win effect from the first hit to the variable display. is executed (179SGS332). When the special ready-to-win effect is not executed from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; N), the effect pattern for the special ready-to-win effect is determined from the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ and stored (179SGS333), and the special ready-to-win effect is performed. End the pattern determination process. On the other hand, if there is execution of a special ready-to-win effect from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; Y), the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect is determined from among the previously executed effect patterns and stored ( 179SGS334), the special reach effect pattern determination process is terminated. Incidentally, in the process of 179SGS331, it is possible to specify whether or not the special ready-to-win effect is to be executed from the first hit to the variable display depending on whether or not there is an effect pattern stored in these 179SGS333 and 179SGS334.

In addition, in the processing of 179SGS333, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), the execution of the special reach production effect pattern α is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and the execution of the special reach production effect pattern β is determined. is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and execution of the special ready-to-win effect with the effect pattern γ is determined at a rate of 33.4%.

In the process of 179SGS334, the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and when the previous special reach effect is executed with the effect pattern α, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B) Then, execution of the special ready-to-reach performance with the performance pattern α is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of the special ready-to-win performance with the performance pattern β is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution with the performance pattern γ of the special ready-to-reach performance is determined. is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and the previous special reach effect is executed in the effect pattern β, as shown in FIG. The performance pattern α of the reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, the performance pattern β of the special reach performance is determined at a rate of 0%, and the performance pattern γ of the special reach performance is performed at 50%. determined by the ratio of Then, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and the previous special reach effect is executed in the effect pattern γ, as shown in FIG. The performance pattern α of the reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, the performance pattern β of the special reach performance is determined at a rate of 50%, and the performance pattern γ of the special reach performance is determined at 0%. determined by the ratio of

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-36(E), the effect pattern α of the special ready-to-win effect is a full-rotation ready-to-win effect in which the character X is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect pattern β of the special ready-to-win effect is is a full-rotation ready-to-reach effect in which the character Y is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and a special ready-to-reach effect effect pattern γ is a full-rotation ready-to-reach effect in which the character Z is mainly displayed on the image display device 5. .

After the effect control CPU 120 executes the special reach effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the effect pattern of the special reach effect in the process of 179SGS294 (see FIG. 8-24), Furthermore, by executing the processing of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290, a special ready-to-win effect is executed in the variable display in the high base state.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach α and super reach β in the high base state and the variable display result is the jackpot A, In the variable display after the 51st time in the high base state, the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α and the super reach β, and the variable display result is the jackpot B, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display. During the period of 20 seconds between the start of the reach and reaching reach, it is possible to execute a high-base medium variable display suggestion effect, and during the execution period of the reach effect (23 seconds or 33 seconds after reaching reach) , the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-46) on the image display device 5 from the second timing during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect to the timing until the end of the variable display. After that, a big-hit decision notification effect is executed to stop and display the decoration pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable display is performed with the super reach γ variation pattern, and the variable display result is a big hit B. , the effect control CPU 120 controls the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the rainbow effect image 179SG005K (Fig. 8 -45) is displayed, and the player is informed that the result of the variable display is a big hit B. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special ready-to-win effect (all-rotation ready-to-win effect) in the image display device 5 over the execution period of the ready-to-win effect (160 seconds after becoming ready-to-win), and ends the special ready-to-win effect. The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the vicinity of the timing. In other words, the jackpot determination notification effect in FIG. 8-37 (B) is executed during 20 seconds before the reach of the movable body 179SG300 and the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-45) on the image display device 5. It consists of a display and a stop display of the decoration pattern during the ready-to-win production.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot A in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, as shown in FIG. While it is reported that the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period and the variable display result becomes a big hit, the variable display result is a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state. In the case of , as shown in FIG. 8-37(B), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display until reaching the reach state, and the result of the variable display is a big hit. (Big hit B) is announced.

Also, focusing on the case where the variable display result is a big hit B in the high base state, as shown in FIG. While it is notified that the variable display will be a big hit from the first timing (the timing within 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach), the second timing (the timing during the execution of the reach effect later than the first timing) ) does not notify that the variable display will be a big hit. Then, when the number of times of variable display is 51 or more, while there is no notification that the variable display will be a big hit from the first timing, the variable display is a big hit from the second timing at a rate of 100%. It is to be notified that it will be.

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, it is always notified that the variable display will be a big hit at the first timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable at the second timing A case may be provided in which it is notified that the display is a big hit.

FIG. 8-38 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect processing. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is in operation (179SGS341). When the ending effect process timer is not in operation (179SGS341; N), the ending effect process timer corresponding to the jackpot type is set (179SGS342). In addition, in the processing of 179SGS342 of the characteristic part 179SG, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 20 seconds according to the first display period is set, and the jackpot type is set. is a big hit B, the ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 45 seconds according to the second display period may be set.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the ending effect process timer (179SGS343), controls the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the process data 1, and controls the ending effect. Processing ends (179SGS344).

Also, when the ending effect process timer is in operation in the process of 179SGS341 (179SGS341; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the ending effect process timer by -1 (179SGS345), and the value is decreased by -1. It is determined whether or not the effect process timer has timed out, that is, whether or not the value of the ending effect process timer has become 0 (179SGS346). When the ending effect process timer times out (179SGS346; Y), the ending effect process data is switched (179SGS347), and the next ending effect process timer is started (179SGS348). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (179SGS349), and the ending effect processing is terminated.

When the ending effect timer has not timed out (179SGS346; N), the effect device is controlled according to the absence of process data corresponding to the ending effect process timer (179SGS350), and the ending effect processing is terminated.

When the ending effect process timer times out in the processing of 179SGS346, the effect control CPU 120 may end the ending effect if the ending effect process timer that has timed out is the last ending effect process timer.

By executing the ending effect processing by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, as shown in FIG. A state entry effect is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state. In addition, the high probability high base state is controlled to the low probability high base state by executing the variable display 100 times, and is controlled to the low probability low base state by executing the variable display 50 times. be.

In other words, the first high base state entry effect in the characteristic portion 179SG is controlled to the high base state over 100 times of variable display, and controlled to the high accuracy state over 150 times of variable display. It is also a production that informs.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (A), in the first high-base state entry effect, "100 times" is displayed as the variable display count (number of time reductions) controlled to the high base state on the image display device 5. It has become so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39(B), when the jackpot game of jackpot B ends, the first ending effect and the second ending effect are executed. More specifically, first, after the first high base state entry effect is displayed for 20 seconds on the image display device 5, the second high base state rush effect is displayed for 25 seconds on the image display device 5. be done. In particular, in the second high base state rush effect, the movable body 179SG300 operates for five seconds after the second high base state rush effect is started. After that, the game state is controlled to the high probability high base state. In addition, the high probability high base state is controlled to the low probability low base state by executing the variable display 150 times.

In other words, the second high base state entry effect in the characteristic portion 179SG is controlled to the high base state over 150 times of variable display, and controlled to the high accuracy state over 150 times of variable display. The ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39(B) includes a second high base state rush effect in addition to the above-described first high base state rush effect.

In addition, in the ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), during the execution of the first high base state rush effect, the image display device 5 is once controlled to the high base state. 100 times” is displayed. Then, the display of "100 times" is updated and displayed to "150 times" in a predetermined period during execution of the second high-base state entry effect (renewal period of time reduction number display shown in FIG. 8-39(B)). .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 8-39(B), in the first high base state entry effect, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state, is executed in an instant. The update from the display of "100 times" to the display of "150 times" in the second high base state entry effect is executed over a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds).

Next, an effect mode during variable display in the low base state in the characteristic portion 179SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-40 to 8-42. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B), a new starting prize is generated during the variable display, and a pending memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice effect based on the starting prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new reserved memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U. .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-40(C) to 8-40(E), when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, which is the aspect of the camera, is started as a new variable display, the front part A timer effect is started as a suggestive effect during variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. Renewal display of a timer for 25 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestive effect during variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. An update display of a timer for 30 seconds, which is a period up to the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(F) to 8-41(H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer until the suggestive effect during the rear variable display, the super ready-to-win effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds (timer performance ends) during execution of the super ready-to-win performance, a big hit suggesting performance or setting suggesting performance is started as a suggesting performance during rear variable display.

Specifically, when execution of a jackpot suggestive effect is determined as the suggestive effect during rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (I) In the image display device 5, a message such as "Chance!" indicating that the expectation of a big hit is low is displayed, and if the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-41 (J) 8 is displayed on the image display device 5 to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the effect pattern that has been determined is the pattern AS-3. As indicated by -41(K), the image display device 5 displays a message indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-2, such as "Extremely Hot!".

On the other hand, when execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during rear variable display, as shown in FIGS. In the case of patterns SS-1 to SS-4, setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters are displayed on the image display device 5, respectively, so that they are set in the pachinko machine 1. settings are suggested. Furthermore, when the effect pattern of the setting value suggesting effect is the pattern SS-5, the setting value suggesting image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4, is displayed on the image display device. 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the reserved memory display is displayed as a pre-reading notice in the form of a blue or red camera, when the pre-reading notice is not executed or the reserved memory display The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or star. Therefore, the player anticipates that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance at the stage when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, and uses the mobile terminal such as a smartphone possessed by the player to suggest setting. It is now possible to make preparations for filming the production. In other words, the pending memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera in the characteristic portion 179SG is also an effect that prompts the player to prepare for photographing the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the presentation mode at the end of the jackpot game and in the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-43 to 8-46.

First, as shown in FIGS. 8-43(A) and 8-43(B), when the jackpot game of jackpot A ends, the first high-base state entry effect is executed as the ending effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays "100 times" as the number of times of variable display (time reduction number of times) controlled to the high base state. After the end of the first high-base state entry effect, the game state is controlled to the high-probability high-base state.

Next, during execution of the jackpot game B, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (A) and 8-44 (B), a predetermined round of the jackpot game (8 rounds in FIG. ) indicates that the jackpot game is a jackpot game of 16 rounds and that the high base state is controlled over 150 times of variable display after the jackpot game ends.

Then, when the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 8-44(C), as part of the ending effect, the first high base state entry effect is first executed, and the image display device 5 is controlled to the high base state. "100 times" is displayed as the number of times of variable display (number of times of time saving). Next, when the first high base state entry effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (D) and 8-44 (E), as a second high base state rush effect, the movable body 179SG300 starts from the standby position. A movement (action) to an effect position and a movement (action) from the effect position to the standby position are executed. When the movable body 179SG300 returns to the standby position, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is updated to the display of "150 times".

Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable display is started as shown in FIGS. Then, the movement (movement) of the movable body 179SG300 from the standby position to the effect position is executed. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K so as to partially overlap the movable body 179SG300 positioned at the effect position. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Then, when the movable body 179SG300 is moved (moved) from the effect position to the standby position, the image display device 5, as a special ready-to-win effect, performs the all-rotation ready-to-win effect in any of the effect pattern α to effect pattern γ. executed. During execution of the all-rotation ready-to-win effect, the image display device 5 displays an effect image 179SG005M different from the effect image 179SG005K in rainbow color together with the image of the all-rotation ready-to-win effect. Therefore, the player recognizes that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by recognizing the display of the effect image 179SG005M in addition to the movement of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to 8-46(A) to FIG. As shown in -46(C), the ready-to-win effect is executed in the same manner as in the low base state. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-46(D), the movable body 179SG300 is moved from the waiting position to the effect position during the ready-to-win effect, and the rainbow effect image 179SG005K is displayed on the image display device 5. is executed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit.

After the movement of the movable body 179SG300 from the performance position to the standby position is executed, the rainbow colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decoration patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big win. .

As described above, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit than the character effect as a suggestive effect during variable front display that suggests the degree of expectation for a big win. As shown in -30 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the suggested effect is set as the suggested effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion performance is executed in a state where the player is paying attention, and the player can be prevented from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as the suggestive effect during the front variable display during the variable display, in addition to the character effect, it is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the suggestive effect during the rear variable display. The player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggesting effect by the execution.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as the timer effect, a numerical value is displayed for the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (see FIGS. 8-40 (D) and 8-40 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, by performing an increase/decrease display of a gauge, meter, etc., the rear variable display is suggested. The period until the start of execution of the effect may not be clearly notified (only an approximate period may be indicated).

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5 Any one of the displays in , or a combination of a plurality of aspects may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-41(H) and 8-42(L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is set to 0. Based on this, there is a case where a big hit suggesting effect is executed in addition to the setting suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display. In other words, even when the timer performance is executed, the big hit suggestion performance may be executed instead of the setting suggestion performance, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as the timer effect becomes 0, the setting suggesting effect and the big hit suggesting effect as the suggesting effect during the rear variable display are performed. Although only one of them can be executed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. , both the setting suggesting performance and the big hit suggesting performance may be executed as the suggesting performance during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display is always executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the suggesting effect during the rear variable display is not executed even if the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (B) and 8-31 (C), as the effect patterns of the timer effect, a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 25 seconds and a pattern TS-1 whose effect period is 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-2, the setting suggesting performance is executed at a higher rate than when the timer performance is executed with the pattern TS-1. In other words, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is suggested that the setting suggesting effect is executed over a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-32, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ready-to-win effect period, which is the latter half of the variable display of super reach, so that the setting suggestion effect by the player is performed. can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half of the super reach variable display, is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half of the super reach variable display.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the pending display notice effect that can be displayed in the mode or the like can be executed, and the display mode is a blue or red camera mode, It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or star. For this reason, in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the value of the pending display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera in which the display mode is blue or red, the player can decide whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. Since the setting-suggestion performance is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting-suggestion performance.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 and 8-42, when the pending display notice effect is executed, it corresponds to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect. The setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the pending display notice effect is ended). Therefore, since the setting suggesting effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display which is the target of the pending display notice effect, the player is less likely to miss the setting suggesting effect. more can be prevented.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, a form in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a holding display notice is used as a pre-reading notice. An effect other than the effect may be made executable, and it may be suggested that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display (the variable display immediately after the pending display previous notice effect is terminated) that is the target of the pending display previous notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the execution period of the pending display notice effect The setting suggestion effect may be executed from the previous timing).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the ratio of displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pre-reading notice effect is changed to the white square or star shape as the pre-reading notice effect. Since the display ratio is set lower than the display ratio, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, so that the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to attract the attention of the operator and further prevent the operator from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as the pre-reading notice effect in the form of a blue or red camera is set as the pre-reading notice effect by displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading preview effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the pending memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading advance notice effect, or the pending memory display as a blue or red camera color as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the reserved memory display as a white square or star as the pre-reading advance notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the mode of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is prepared to shoot the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smart phone before starting the setting suggesting effect, the success rate of photographing the setting suggesting effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the pending display notice effect, the player is made ready to shoot the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pending display notice effect, from the speakers 8L and 8R Alternatively, the player may be separately prompted to prepare for photographing the setting suggesting effect by outputting a sound or displaying a message image on the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern γ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ for displaying the pending memory display in the form of a red camera are used to perform the pending display notice effect. It can be executed, and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the pending memory display is displayed in the blue camera mode (when the value of the pending display flag is 3) and when the pending memory display is red The ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different between the case of displaying in the camera mode (the value of the pending display flag is 4). In particular, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a red camera, setting suggestion effects are executed at a higher rate than when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. When the display is displayed in the form of a red camera, the player is more focused on whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than in the case where the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera. It is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the characteristic part 179SG of the present embodiment, when the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode, the pending memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display starts. Although the form in which the form does not change has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display form of the pending memory display changes from the blue camera form to the red camera form. Further, the pending memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the blue camera mode to the red camera mode. may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the setting suggesting effect is executed until the variable display is finished, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestive effect is only in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern with a long special figure variation time. It is executable, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period is suppressed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-32, the execution period of the setting suggestion production is set to 7 seconds longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so the super reach variable It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during execution of the ready-to-win effect).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display is super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that it is a variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the setting suggestion performance is executed by displaying the pending memory display in the form of a blue or red camera, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

Also, as shown in Figure 8-22, if the variation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, if it is determined that the special figure variation time is shorter than the super reach, the pending display Since the pending memory display is not displayed in the blue or red camera mode as the advance notice effect, the player's attention is not focused on the pending memory display being displayed in the blue or red camera mode. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the setting suggesting effect from being executed and the interest to be lowered due to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display being the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, during the variable display of super reach, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect during the front variable display including the timer effect, but it is more special than the variable display of super reach. Since the timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach with a short fluctuation time, the suggestive effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is not executed Timer effect during the variable display of non-reach and normal reach It is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconsistency in the performance due to the execution of

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected. Always determine the variation pattern to be the variation pattern of super reach γ, and if the variable display result is a big hit B in the variable display after the 51st time in the high base state, be sure to select the big hit variation pattern determination table A Since the variation pattern is determined to be any one of normal reach, super reach α and super reach β, the big win game state of the big win B is prevented from occurring continuously in a short period of time, and the second during the variable display. Since the fact that the variable display result is a big hit B is announced early at one timing, it is possible to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to the lengthening of the variable display period.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit is performed from the first timing before reaching the reach and after reaching the reach (during the production of the reach). ) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Both of the two timings may be set as the timing before reaching the reach or the timing after reaching the reach, and the movable body 179SG300 may be operated from each timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, a form is exemplified in which it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot A or a jackpot B by operating the movable body 179SG300 during the variable display in the high base state. The invention is not limited to this, and when the movable body 179SG300 operates during the variable display in the high base state, it may be limited only to the case where the variable display result is a big win B. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the movable body 179SG300 operates during variable display in the high base state, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is always determined to be the variation pattern of super reach γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is changed to the super reach γ variation pattern. It may be possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach at a rate lower than the determined rate. Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result after the 51st variable display in the high base state is a big hit B, the variation pattern is set at a rate that is lower than the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach. A case may be provided in which the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, the variable display from the 1st to 50th times, which is the "first period" after the end of the jackpot game, and the variable display after the 51st time, which is the "second period" (51st to 100th or 51st times) ~ Variable display up to 150 times), and the form controlled to the high-precision high base state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high-precision high base state in the present invention is controlled In addition to these "first period" and "second period", the "third period" may be included as the period to be set. Regarding these "first period", "second period", and "third period", if the "second period" is a period after the "first period", the "third period" is " It may be a period before the "first period", a period between the "first period" and the "second period", or a period after the "second period".

Further, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 executes the special ready-to-win effect pattern determination process shown in FIG. Since the all-rotation ready-to-win effect as the ready-to-win effect can be executed, the excitement of the jackpot confirmation notification effect in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the full rotation reach production is performed as part of the big hit confirmation notification production during the variable display. Although an executable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, a different effect from the all-rotation ready-to-win effect may be executed.

Furthermore, when the all-rotation reach effect is executed during the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 before the all-rotation reach effect. Since 179SG005M is displayed, it becomes easy to understand that the game is controlled to the big win game state of the big win B after the variable display, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, a form in which the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 during the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state was exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and as long as it is an effect that makes it easy to understand that it is controlled to the big win game state of the big win B after the variable display, the effect to be executed before the all-rotation ready-to-win effect can be Effects other than the movement of the body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M may be used.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the special ready-to-win effect in any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ, and can set the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect. At the time of determination, since the performance pattern is determined from among the performance patterns executed last time is excluded, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest caused by the repeated execution of the special ready-to-win performance with the same performance pattern. .

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, the production pattern of the special ready-to-win production can be determined from three production patterns from the production pattern α to the production pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, the effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect may be determined from two or less effect patterns, or may be determined from four or more effect patterns.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 179SG, an effect pattern of a special ready-to-win effect once determined to be executed is exemplified as a form in which the special ready-to-reach effect is determined again by executing the special ready-to-reach effect in another effect pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the special ready-to-win effect once determined to be executed, until a predetermined period elapses (until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed, or until a predetermined time elapses) (until it is done) may be made undecidable again as an effect pattern of the special ready-to-win effect. Furthermore, for the special ready-to-win performance once determined to be executed, a special It is also possible to make it undecidable again as the effect pattern of the ready-to-win effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 179SG, when the production pattern of the special ready-to-win production is determined, the special ready-to-win production continues in a specific production pattern by determining the production pattern lottery from among the previous production patterns excluded. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to prevent the ready-to-win effect from being continuously executed in a specific effect pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a first high base state rush effect and a second high base state rush effect as the ending effect after the jackpot game. In particular, after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, the image display device 5 displays "100 times", which is the variable number of times of display controlled to the high base state by executing the first high base state entry effect, and then the second display is performed. 2. By operating the movable body 179SG300 as an effect of entering the high base state and switching the display of "100 times", which is the number of times of variable display controlled in the high base state, to the display of "150 times", a jackpot game state is entered. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from excessively increasing by shortening the control interval.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 179SG, after the big win A big win game, only the first high base state entry performance is executed, and after the big win B big win game, the second high base state rush performance is further executed after the first high base state rush performance. Although a mode of executing a rush effect is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B, the effect is partially different from the first high base state rush effect. After executing , the second high base state entry effect may be executed.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-39(B) and 8-44(F), after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state entering effect, the high base state is controlled. Although the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times, is updated to the display of "150 times" over a predetermined period of time, the present invention is not limited to this, The display of "100 times", which is the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state, is performed directly after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state entry effect, without the update display of the previous predetermined period. may be updated to the display of

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (D) to 8-44 (F), as the second high base state entry effect, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to "150 times". ”, it is possible to emphasize to the player that it is controlled to the high-precision high-base state over a maximum of 150 times of variable display, so the second high-base state rush effect It is possible to reduce the decrease in game interest caused by the performance period being longer than the first high base state rush performance.

In addition, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to the display of "150 times" as the movable body 179SG300 moves. Since it is possible to further emphasize to the player that it is controlled to the high base state over the variable display, the second high base state rushing effect is longer than the first high base state rushing effect. It is possible to further reduce the decrease in the interest in the game caused by a long period of time.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 179SG, along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300, the display of "100 times", which is the number of variable display times controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to the display of "150 times". is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of "100 times", which is the variable display count controlled to the high base state, is performed by replacing the operation of the movable body 179SG300 with the speaker 8L, The display of "150 times" may be updated together with the sound output from 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

For example, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when the character production is executed, and the suggestion production is set as the suggestion production during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character production is executed as the suggestion production during the front variable display. is set to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestive effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestive effect during the variable front display, the variable front part It may be set so that the set suggesting effect is executed as the suggesting effect during rear variable display at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the suggesting effect during display.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square, a star, or a blue 8-48 (A) and FIG. 8-48 (A) and As shown in FIG. 8-48(B), when the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory display area 179SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 179SG005E overlaps the second reserved memory display area 179SG005U, at least the reserved memory display in the mode of the blue or red camera is displayed preferentially over the effect image 179SG005E (the blue or red camera The reserved memory display in the form of (1) may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 179SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera because the reserved memory display in the form of the blue or red camera is blocked by the effect image 179SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-49(A) and 8-49(B), as a modification 179SG-3, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect for 7 seconds during variable display of normal reach and non-shortening non-reach. good too. Furthermore, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, a period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), it is a special variable time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach 3 seconds (shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds) may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 179SG-4, the pending memory display is a blue camera mode The ratio of determination of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggesting effect may be different between the case of displaying in and the case of displaying in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which of the mode of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera the suspension storage display is displayed as the suspension display advance notice effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as the start timing of the hint effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the setting suggestive effect is more likely to be executed as the rear variable display suggestive effect by executing the rear variable display suggestive effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 179SG-. As 5, when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect start timing is 25 seconds after the variable display start. SS-3 to pattern SS-5, etc., may be performed with effect patterns suggesting high set values. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestive effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestive effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the pending memory display displayed as the pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect that is executed as a suggestive effect during the front variable display and the effect that is displayed as a pending display notice effect It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by only one of the display mode of the reserved memory display. Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode is illustrated in which the set suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display in which the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display is executed. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, a setting suggestion effect is performed during the big win game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, when the suspension display forewarning effect is already executed, the execution of the new suspension display forewarning effect is restricted, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the pending display forewarning effect has already been executed, only the execution of the new pending display foretelling effect in a part of the display patterns may be restricted. For example, when the pending display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the pending memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new pending display notice effect is executed. It restricts only what is executed in the display pattern α and the display pattern β (that the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of pending display forewarning effects with different suggested contents. Furthermore, when the pending display forewarning effect is already executed by the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the execution of the new pending display forewarning effect by the display pattern α or the display pattern β is restricted. , the player can be made to pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. Also, if the pending display notice effect has already been executed in display pattern α or display pattern β (when the pending memory display is displayed as a white square or star), a new pending display notice effect By limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (that the pending memory display is displayed in a blue or red camera mode), it is possible to determine whether the variable display result will be a big hit or not. It is possible to make the player pay more attention.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which the holding display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch effect in the present invention is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect Alternatively, an effect other than the pending display notice effect may be executable if the effect is executable from the timing before the target variable display is started.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a form in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as an indication effect during the front variable display indicating that the variable display result will be a big hit was exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect other than the character effect and the timer effect may be executed as the suggestive effect during the front part variable display as long as it is a effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit.

Further, in the characterizing part 179SG of the above-described embodiment, after displaying "100 times" which is the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state on the image display device 5 as the first high base state entry effect, the second high base state is displayed. As the base normal rush effect, the display of "100 times" is exemplified to be updated to "150 times", but the present invention is not limited to this. As the effect for entering the high base state, the image display device 5 displays the number of times of variable display controlled to the high base state as an initial display of "0 times", and then changes the display of "0 times" to "100 times". You may update and display until display. In this case, as the second high-base state entry effect, the update speed for updating the display of "100 times" to "150 times" is updated from the display of "0 times" to "100 times". By making it slower than the update speed, it is possible to further emphasize that the high-precision high-base state is controlled over a maximum of 150 variable displays, so that the second high-base state rush effect is changed to the first high-base state. It is possible to further reduce the decrease in game interest caused by the performance period being longer than the state entry performance.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above-described embodiment, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the background color effect image 179SG005K on the image display device 5 and the display of the big hit are shown as the big hit confirmation notification effect that can be executed during the variable display. Although the form in which the stationary display of decorative patterns in combination can be executed has been exemplified, as the jackpot confirmation notification performance that can be executed during the variable display, combinations of performances other than these may be used. The fixed notification effect may simply be a stop display of decorative symbols in a combination indicating a big hit.

Further, in the characterizing portion 179SG of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 and 8-39, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is finished, only the first high base state entry effect is performed based on the process data of 1. , and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is finished, the first high-base state rush effect and the second high-base state rush effect are executed based on one process data. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the jackpot game of jackpot B is finished, the first high base state rushing effect and the second high base state rushing effect may be executed based on different process data. By doing so, the first high base state entry effect can be executed based on the common process data after the jackpot game A and after the jackpot game B is finished, so the data capacity of the ROM 121 can be saved.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

Variable display is performed, and includes a first advantageous state (for example, a big win game state of jackpot A) advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous than the first advantageous state. A game machine which has a plurality of advantageous states and can be set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits) (Pachinko game machine 1). and
A first period from the end of the advantageous state until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, a period until the variable display is performed 50 times), and after the variable display is performed the predetermined number of times In a period including at least a second period (for example, a period in which the 51st to 100th or 51st to 150th variable display is performed), the frequency in which the variable display is performed is a special state (for example, a high game state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing) and
When executing variable display, the first variable display period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6) and the first variable A second variable display period that is longer than the display period (for example, 180 seconds, which is the special fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 8-6) From among a plurality of different variable display periods Variable display period determination means for determining the variable display period of 1 (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17);
A notification effect that notifies that the control is at least in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that moves the body 179SG300) is the first timing during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the timing in 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach) A second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37(A), a timing within 23 seconds or 33 seconds from reaching reach during variable display to ending variable display ), a notification effect execution means that can be executed at a plurality of different timings (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display);
with
The notification effect executing means has a higher ratio of the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state during the first period than during the second period. The notification effect can be executed at the first timing, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C), the 1st to 50th variable When the variable display result is the big hit B in the display, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing, and when the variable display result is the big hit B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. , the part where the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the second timing),
When the variable display of the second variable display period is executed in the first period, it is possible to execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 8-35 Part that can execute all rotation reach production as special reach production by executing special reach production pattern determination processing),
In the special notification effect, it is possible to execute an effect using a mode corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-45, a rainbow colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed),
The variable display period determination means is such that the variable display executed based on the control to the second advantageous state is higher when executed during the first period than during the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period when the variable display is executed in the second period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is running (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, the 1-50th variable display in the high base state). When the variable display result is the big hit B, the variable pattern is always determined to be the super reach γ variation pattern by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table B, and the variation pattern is variable in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. If the display result is a big hit B, the part that always determines the fluctuation pattern to be one of the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the big hit variation pattern determination table A)
moreover,
The selection ratio of the variable display period (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the first period, the selection rate of the variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing" occurs, in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display 1 second period) is higher than the first period [excluding the final variation]).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from occurring in succession in a short period of time, while preventing an increase in dissatisfaction and delay due to an increase in the variable display period. Furthermore, when the game state is the special state, it is possible to realize a healthy game and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, the notification effect may be associated with the set value. For example, when the set value is high (4 to 6), the notification performance may be executed at a specific timing more than when the set value is low (1 to 3). By doing so, it is possible to guess the set value from the execution timing of the notification effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, the setting value may be suggested by the effect mode during the first advantageous state and the effect mode during the second advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to guess the setting value according to the mode of presentation, and the interest is improved.

Also, the setting suggestion effect may be performed in the first period in the special state. By doing so, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first period (the first half of the special state) in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period is likely to be selected in order to realize a sound game. In particular, the selection ratio of each variable display pattern is common regardless of the set value, and the set value cannot be determined by the selection ratio of each variable display pattern. can.
Also, when performing the setting suggesting effect, the setting value may be suggested by a plurality of elements. In this way, when setting values that are advantageous to the player are suggested for a plurality of factors, the player can be more confident that the setting values are advantageous to the player. Even if no set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, if the set value that is advantageous to the player is suggested by another element, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player. , can improve the game interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, any set value among a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage (set values 1 to 6 with different ranges of random numbers for judging a big hit) A configurable gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1),
Variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display);
A game state control means (CPU 103) that controls the game state,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player, and a special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state), high probability / second KT state) which is a game state different from the above advantageous state and advantageous to the player (Small hit RUSH state)) and can be controlled,
The selection ratio of the variable display pattern (variation pattern) is common regardless of the setting value (as shown in FIG. 12-6, the determination value of the variation pattern determination table is common regardless of the setting value),
In the special state (high probability / high base state (variable probability state)), a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) after the first period (game state shifts to high probability / high base state (variable probability state) until the special game is executed, or until the jackpot gaming state is reached before the predetermined number of special games are executed), and the second period after the first period (the gaming state is high A period (51 times or later or 101 times or later) after a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of the special figure game is executed without becoming a jackpot game state after the transition to the high base state. can be,
In the first period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period longer than the predetermined period is higher than in the second period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is " In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when it becomes "loss", "normal reach loss" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (fluctuation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is higher than the second period),
In the second period, the selection ratio of the variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined period is higher than in the first period (as shown in FIGS. 12-6 (A1) and (C1), the display result is When "losing", in the second period, "non-reach losing (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display 1 second period) is higher than the first period [excluding the final variation]). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of form.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 207SG of this Embodiment)

Next, the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-7, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 207SG003, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set in two places on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area in which a game ball hit harder than the game ball flowing down (right-handed) passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general prize winning opening 10, and the right game area 207SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-7, the main board 11 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the game machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is a state in which the game hall clerk or the like can check the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state). ) is also

A setting-switching main body portion provided with operation portions that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11. The lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the substrate case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003 using the key. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch that can execute switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, with a setting key. In the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values, which will be described later, is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a second 1st special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st suspension display capable of displaying the number of 1st suspension memories device 207SG025A, second reservation display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reservation memory number, normal design display 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal design, normal design reservation display 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal design reservation memory, A round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, and a game state in which game balls such as a high base state (time saving state) or jackpot game state are launched toward the right game area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a variable probability lamp 207SG133 that lights in the variable probability state, and a short time lamp 207SG134 that lights in the high base state (shorter time state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of an 8-segment LED. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A uses two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of LEDs that light up) for each big win type as the variable display result. Derivation display is possible. In addition, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B variably displays two kinds of big win symbols (a combination of lit LEDs) for each big win type. Results and derivations can be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, each of the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. With these first pending display 207SG025A and second pending display 207SG025B, if the number of pending memories is 1, only the LED at the left end lights up. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time a variable display is executed, the reserve memory is reduced (consumed), so that the LED in the reserve display corresponding to the variable display is shifted in a predetermined shift direction (feature of this embodiment). In the part 207SG, the lights are extinguished toward the left direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is preferentially executed. It looks like Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-6, for example, when there is one first special figure pending memory and two second special figure pending memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first pending indicator 207SG025A is lit and the left two LEDs of the second suspension indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure suspension memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure suspension memory After that, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the round indicator 207SG131 consists of five segments (LEDs). Incidentally, as the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: jackpot A that is a 5-round jackpot, jackpot B that is a 10-round jackpot, and jackpot C that is a 15-round jackpot. Which of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 lights up differs depending on the types of these jackpots.

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation of the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. and LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can move between their respective origin positions and effect positions during variable display, etc. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is positioned at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is positioned at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting that is connected.

FIG. 9-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command indicating a predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command for notifying a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor win".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time saving control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time saving control is performed (high base state , time-saving state) is the second game state designation command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command for designating the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In the error (abnormality) specification command, for example, by setting EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) occurrence has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by error notification processing, which will be described later.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for a large winning opening that notifies that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the performance image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning mouth and the notification command after opening the big winning mouth, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or the small win game state (for example, "1" to "15"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command that notifies that the second start condition for executing the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to display the number of special figure reserved storage so that it can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number, in order to display the number of special figure pending storage so as to be identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big win" and the judgment result of the big win type (probability variation, non-probability variation, and sudden probability) as a result of determination at the time of winning. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating whether the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is a command.

The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (that power has been restored, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started after clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that a setting value change operation has started in the pachinko game machine 1 (that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value change state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has started the setting value confirmation operation (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in the setting value confirmation state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, etc., and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that performs control operations by executing a program for game control, and update of numerical data indicating random numbers independently from the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby executing processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them in the variable data write operation, Variation data reading operation to read, CPU103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105, CPU103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via I / O105 and a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-9, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for the big hit type determination, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for judgment, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the normal map display, and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are used as values within the ranges shown in FIGS. 9-9, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Figures 9-10 show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "minor hit". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach performance such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, . A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, as for the super reach variation patterns, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ may be provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10, for the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is executed, the super reach fluctuation pattern super reach α, super reach β is set shorter than Also, for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in this embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed Toku-zu fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach α is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach are set so that the degree of expectation for the big hit becomes higher in the order of the variable display result "big hit", so the normal reach variation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into types of fluctuation patterns such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc. Rather than first determining and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and these variations After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random number value for determining the pattern type, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10, the form in which the content of variation (content of presentation) is determined in advance for each variation pattern is exemplified. This is not a limitation, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of variation (content of presentation) may differ according to the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the normal reach variation pattern will be lost, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that results in non-reach loss by executing twice, a variation pattern that results in super reach loss by executing pseudo-continuous effect three times, and so on may be used.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generating program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in FIGS. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the second special figure display result shown in FIG. 9-11 (B) Judgment table (setting value 2), first special figure display result judgment table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), second special figure display result judgment table shown in FIG. 9-12 (B) (Setting value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4 ), the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), FIG. In addition to the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -21 (A), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Fig. 9-21 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table, the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, a deviation fluctuation pattern determination table, a normal diagram display result determination table (not shown), a normal diagram fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the gaming facility side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the gaming facility side as the values decrease in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become.

9-11(A) to 9-16(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) in which the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the feature part 207SG of this embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, and when the set value is 3, 1/ 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-16, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state according to each setting value Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability change for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the short-time state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time-saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 9-11 (A), Figure 9-12 (A), Figure 9-13 (A), Figure 9-14 (A), Figure 9-15 (A), Figure 9-16 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure. Judgment values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result judgment table. Specifically, Figure 9-11 (B), Figure 9-12 (B), Figure 9-13 (B), Figure 9-14 (B), Figure 9-15 (B), Figure 9-16 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" may be varied according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-18, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 9-19, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value is regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-20, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, non-common numerical range Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the judgment value contained in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, and regardless of the game state and setting value, hit judgment Based on the value of 32767, the variable display result is determined with the determination value contained within a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and the control to the big win game state is determined is the highest. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled to the big hit game state as "big hit" (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit C). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with the probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9-16(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit and the probability (percentage) of a small hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win gaming state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In this embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Figures 9-21 (A) and Figure 9-21 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 9-21 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 9-21 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type from jackpot A to jackpot C based on a random number (MR2) for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern. This table is referenced to determine

Here, the jackpot types in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-22. In the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the jackpot A (also called non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to the low probability high base state and the jackpot game A big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a variable probability big hit) are set in which high-probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end and shift to a high-probability-high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. B" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which 15 rounds (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by "jackpot A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends by entering a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, the high-precision control and time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the big win B or the big win C are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the big win game state ends. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is the big win B or the big win C, the high accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big win game state ends, so that the big win game state is continuous without going through the normal state. This is the so-called continuous state that occurs in

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are two jackpot types. You may provide less than a kind or four kinds or more.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is the highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "4", 0 to 99 in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C in the range of 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. (No decision value is assigned to jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the second special symbol, only time-saving control is executed after the big-hit game ends. and variable probability control are executed, the ratio of determining the big win C becomes lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1. - 特許庁That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the number of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. In other words, the fact that the decision ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value means that one of the jackpot types is not decided (the decision ratio is 0%). However, even when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, a case may be provided in which the big win type is determined to be the big win B. .

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game interest can be improved. It has become.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by: You may determine using MR1 which is a random number value for special figure display result determination.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of the big win increases, and the big win C as the big win type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but this invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). A game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area A switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (a game state is changed to a variable state or a variable state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state.

In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and the variable display result will be a "small hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, each variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and 9-23 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the jackpot variation pattern determination table used when the jackpot type is jackpot A (jackpot A ) and a big-hit variation pattern judgment table (for big-hit B, big-hit C) used when the big-hit types are for big-hit B and big-hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B, jackpot C) include the variation pattern for the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern for the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot. A predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the variation patterns (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win A), if the setting value is "1", 1 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 400 is assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 is super reach It is assigned to the β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "2", 1 to 380 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "3", 1 to 360 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 361 to 820 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "4", 1 to 340 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 341 to 805 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "5", 1 to 320 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 321 to 790 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 in the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 301 to 775 is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-23 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big win B and big win C), if the setting value is "1", , 1 to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of super reach β jackpot. Also, if the set value is "2", 1 to 180 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 181 to 510 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 160 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "4", 1 to 140 out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 141 to 430 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, if the set value is "5", 1 to 120 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 390 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). Also, when the set value is "6", 1 to 100 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 It is assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special game, the ratio of determining the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2) is the ratio of determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3). and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or jackpot C is won in the special game, the ratio for determining the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) determines the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, super reach β is likely to be determined when the type of big win is "big win B" or "big win C", and the type of big win is "big win A". In some cases, the super reach α is assigned so that it can be easily determined, so that when the variation pattern of the super reach β is executed, a "jackpot B" or a "jackpot C" may occur. can raise the expectations of

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1), a predetermined random value out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value. assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of 1 to 6, the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997 Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In this embodiment, only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as a small hit variation pattern, Variation patterns for small hits with set values 1 to 6 may be determined at different rates from a plurality of variation patterns.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss used when the number of pending memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the time saving control is not performed, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table for loss A, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super A predetermined random number is assigned as a judgment value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation within the range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for 1 or less total pending storage in low base), if the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss B, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss corresponding to the total number of retained memories of 2 to 4 (PA1-2), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), super A predetermined random value is assigned as a judgment value from the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the fluctuation pattern of reach α deviation (PA2-2) and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). It is

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 481 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", 1 to 460 out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss C, a shortened non-reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total number of pending memories of 5 to 8, a normal reach loss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), a super Predetermined random values within the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the reach α deviation and the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation are assigned as judgment values. It is

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for failure (for the number of total pending storage in the low base of 5 or more), when the setting value is "1", the determination value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach deviation corresponding to the time saving control (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α variation pattern deviation (PA2-2), a predetermined random number within the possible range of the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) that is out of super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation D (for high base medium), when the set value is "1", out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach β deviation. In addition, when the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). Also, if the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3). In addition, when the set value is "6", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 Is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach out (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β out of (PA2-3).

Thus, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of deciding the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of deciding the normal reach fluctuation pattern are set to decrease in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Also, when using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for deviation, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are super reach α deviation fluctuation patterns, and 901 to 997 are super reach β deviations, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Assigned to each variation pattern, that is, if the variable display result is out, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value, so the variation pattern of super reach It is possible to prevent the production effect from being lowered due to the variable display by not being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the super reach α loss variation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β loss variation pattern as the loss variation pattern are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach α and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β are between each set value may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, the determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern is the same regardless of the set value. , The present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern between non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are exemplified in a form that is the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is out, super reach α Regardless of the setting value in which only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of super reach β is set, it may be the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a loss, regardless of the set value that is set, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α and the variation pattern of the super reach β Although both determination ratios are the same regardless of the set values, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is a failure, a mode is exemplified in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach differs according to the set value. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, if the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine any variation pattern (the determination ratio is 0%) or to set a specific variation pattern to 100% It also includes determining the ratio of

In addition, the variation pattern (PA1-2) of non-reach deviation is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-1) of non-reach deviation without shortening, and the fluctuation time is shorter than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIGS. 9-10). Therefore, when the number of retained memories increases, a non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, making it easier to digest the retained memories, and the number of retained memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By starting winning when there is no reserve memory, it becomes difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long. Determining the pattern (PA1-1) lengthens the variable display time, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game due to non-execution of the variable display.

Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the mode for determining the pattern is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first A variation pattern may be determined using a different variation pattern determination table for losing according to the reserved memory number of special symbols, or the reserved memory number of the second special symbol when variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In addition, in each loss variation pattern determination table of the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation of super reach loss The random number ranges assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the probability of losing differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the variable display to be actually executed in the variation pattern of losing the super reach (the probability of losing the super reach) Appearance rate of variation pattern) is different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, a mode is exemplified in which the ratio of the variable display to be executed in the variation pattern of super reach out in accordance with the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, but considering the jackpot probability and the probability of losing for each set value, the variable display is super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. may be executed with a variation pattern of

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 207SG150 shown in FIG. . The game control data holding area 207SG150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 207SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 207SG152, and a game control timer setting unit. 207SG153, a game control counter setting unit 207SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 207SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is a special feature that has not yet been started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special figure display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B, although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, it has not started yet. It stores the pending data of the special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, etc. extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment are held data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 207SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern hold storage unit 207SG151C stores the normal pattern game hold information which has not yet been started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 207SG151C is associated with the reservation number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate, and is for determining the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 207SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 207SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 207SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 207SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data representing each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. A data holding area 207SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 207SG190 shown in FIG. 9-26(A) includes the production control flag setting unit 207SG191, the production control timer setting unit 207SG192, the production control counter setting unit 207SG193, and the production control buffer setting unit 207SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 207SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 207SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 207SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 207SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 207SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure in the variable display. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being displayed in a variable manner. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the effect symbol variation stop process executed when ending.

Furthermore, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning, the reservation display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reservation storage display is set is set to the first special figure reservation storage and A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage.

It should be noted that the pending display flag stores "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display when execution of the pending display prior notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process. , When the suspension memory display of the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first suspension memory display area 5D and the second suspension memory display area 5U, and execution of the suspension display notice effect is determined, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode ) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, and the variation corresponding to the reserved memory display In the display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a high possibility of super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores a command from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 207SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting mouth winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 207SG194A shown in FIG. 9-26(B) is an entry (buffer Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to start -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the variable display to start are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-26 (B), when the variable display of the effect pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is being variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice setting process in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry in which the pending display flag is not set, and the pending display flag is set. If there is an entry that is not displayed, depending on whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed based on the pattern designation command and the variable category command stored corresponding to the entry, and whether the pending display notice effect is executed It determines the display mode (display pattern) of the pending memory display. When the execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the pending memory display mode is determined from the square (◇) and the star (☆), and when the non-execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, the display mode of the pending memory display. is determined as a white ○. Then, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the reserved storage display is set to the reserved display flag.

After the pending display flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (see FIG. 9-52) so that the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 207SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 207SG005U.

Note that the feature part 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a pending display notice effect can be executed as a prefetch notice effect that can be determined to be executed in the prefetch notice setting process, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, as the pre-reading notice effect, the background change effect in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 changes, and the operation effect in which the movable body provided in the pachinko game machine 1 operates. An effect other than the display announcement effect may be made executable.

Next, the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display section 207SG029A, a second display section 207SG029B, a third display section 207SG029C, and a fourth display section 207SG029D. Each of the first display portion 207SG029A to the fifth display portion 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the figure "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. These first display section 207SG029A to fifth display section 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or a so-called rainbow while changing these colors in an extremely short period.

In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment is executed using the area outside the test object in the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko game machine 1. .

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 (B) and 9-27 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all gaming states Base L which is (real time value during measurement), Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every 1st out 6000 balls in all game states, and Base 1 in all game states Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 2nd out-out every 6000 balls, and the normal state (low-probability-low base state) for every 3rd out-out in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in , can be displayed. Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed on display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L. ” is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from “00” to “99”) are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display section 207SG029B to display "b1." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display section 207SG029B in order to display "b2." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D. Further, when displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display section 207SG029A and "3." is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display section 207SG029C and the fourth display section 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of this embodiment, the main substrate 11 (CPU 103) controls the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 to sequentially display them. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the main substrate 11 performs control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The base values displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 are displayed in different colors according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-28, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko game machine When the setting value set to 1 is "2", each base value is displayed in blue on the display monitor 207SG029, and when the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is "4", each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko game machine 1 is set to "5", each base value is displayed in red on the display monitor 207SG029. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, the game parlor clerk or the like can identify the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value change processing described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. 9-30 is a flow chart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). move on.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started this time (RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) or not ( 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) without executing, go to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022; (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, ie, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started according to the formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned ON, and the clear switch is operated, the pachinko game is played. When the machine 1 is started), the set values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), if the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and if the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. Cold start notification is started by starting blinking (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 stops blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be made to flash. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and the interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), Fig. 9-36 As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B that constitute the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal set value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change. , the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (B), the CPU 103 flashes all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the game hall, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a store clerk, etc.), and the display monitor 207SG029 , the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is recovered, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B notify the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

FIG. 9-31(A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) where the RAM clear flag is stored. (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042.If the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), further , and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area as shown in FIG. 9-31(B). Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

It should be noted that the characterizing portion 207SG in this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set values are cleared in the RAM clearing process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When activated by the start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 and after in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG in this embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the processing of storing and reading RAM clear flags in RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag can be changed by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 9-32 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first holding indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa052, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6). lighting is started (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is stored in address F000 in RAM 102. is set to "1" (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1̂& is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power failure detection process execution wait timer for waiting until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process advances to 207SGSa065. The content is updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, the set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and a value larger by one than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. Then, the display monitor 207SG029 displays the set values stored in the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF at 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and turn off all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A, and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is the same. If the set value stored at address F001 is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is stored at address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 9-33 is a flow chart showing set value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first holding indicator. 207SG025A starts blinking the second suspension indicator 207SG025B (207SGSa102, see FIG. 9-37(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C shown in FIG. 9-6). lighting is started (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power failure detection process execution to wait until the power failure detection process is performed (207SGSa105 ). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processing of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa107; Y) executes a power failure detection process (207SGSa108). This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. In addition, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 ends (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the lighting of the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second By starting the blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right strike lamp 207SG232, a player or a store clerk of the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that the pachinko machine 1 is changing the setting value or that the setting value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, at the start of the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, as a mode corresponding to the setting value change processing or the setting value confirmation processing, out of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 Although a form in which only one LED is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments that constitute the round indicator 207SG131 is the jackpot A, jackpot shown in FIG. 9-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , the segments that make up the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lights may be lit in different modes at the start of the process and at the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power cut off), the lock switch 207SG051 is pressed while the game machine frame 207SG003 is open. , and the clear switch are turned on to execute the set value change process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35(A) to 9-35(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the first display section 207SG029A and the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the display using the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 9-27) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (disconnected), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the frame 207SG003 for the game machine is open. (The clear switch is turned off) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 (A), 9-35 (B) and 9-35 (E), the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned OFF to display the first The display using the display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D (the display of the base values shown in FIG. 9-27) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the setting value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 9-34 is a flow chart showing power failure detection processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change processing and set value confirmation processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (207SGS081). When there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and when there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the set value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), and stores the identified backup data in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed later.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 207SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 9-39. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (207SGS501a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (207SGS501a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS502). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 207SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 207SGS502 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (207SGS502; N), for example, the storage value of the start opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" (207SGS503) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 207SGS501a (207SGS501a; N), and when the number of first special figure reservation storage has reached the upper limit at 207SGS502 (207SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is ON (207SGS501b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (207SGS501b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (207SGS505). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, it is sufficient to be able to specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At 207SGS505, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (207SGS505; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" (207SGS506). .

After executing either of the processes of 207SGS503 and 207SGS506, update so as to add 1 to the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer (207SGS507). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (207SGS508). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 207SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 207SGS508, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 207SG154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted and specified (207SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (207SGS510). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A, while when the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of 207SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time. It is specified to determine the variable display result in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525).

Following the processing of 207SGS510, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (207SGS511). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the process of 207SGS511, the winning random number determination process is executed (207SGS512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, etc., the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (207SGS513). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of 207SGS513, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (207SGS514). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (207SGS514; Y), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (207SGS515), and then the processing of 207SGS504 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting buffer value is "2" (207SGS514; N), after clearing the starting buffer and initializing the stored value to "0" (207SGS516), the starting winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 9-40(A) is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 207SGS 512 of FIG. 9-39 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic portion 207SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is set as "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state is determined and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning of 207SGS512. By determining whether or not it is determined to stop displaying the big hit pattern or the small winning pattern as a special figure display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. conduct. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

9-40 (A) in the random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-40 (A), the CPU103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time-saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152, etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (207SGS521). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-31(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIG. 9-42, processing is performed to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 determines the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 207SGS572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not become a big hit (207SGS572; N), a small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table Compare the numerical range of the value with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at 207SGS509 in FIG. 9-39 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 207SGS574 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 9-40 (A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display at 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (207SGS526; N) Check whether it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "miss (207SGS527a), whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time-saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

In addition, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a jackpot A, a third pattern designation command in the case of a jackpot B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the symbol designation command (207SGS534), then select and set the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern (207SGS535), and set to 207SGS536. move on.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y ), select and set the variation pattern determination table D for failure (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these variation pattern determination table A and deviation pattern determination table D, this characteristic unit 207SG has a variation pattern determination for deviation that is used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4. A table B and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. In, for non-reach fluctuation patterns, among the ranges that can be taken by the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 1 to 450 when the setting value 1 is 1, 1 to 430 when the setting value is 2, When the set value is 3, 1 to 410 are assigned, when the set value is 4, 1 to 390 are assigned, when the set value is 5, 1 to 370 are assigned, and when the set value is 6, 1 to 350 are assigned.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 out of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern are assigned regardless of the set value. there is

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is made after the determination. Also always becomes a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic part 207SG, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the variable display mode of "non-reach" is common. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIG. 9-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In 207SGS541, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (207SGS541; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, at 207SGS541, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of the first special figure reserved memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the processing of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at 207SGS541, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A The indicated pending data is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the processing of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 9-31(B)) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not there is a memory of the determined used set value (207SGS551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is the same as the stored determined used set value (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the effect control board 12 In addition to setting for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. go into processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so the loop processing puts the pachinko gaming machine in a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment has the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game parlor can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, so that the pachinko game can be played. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state. However, the CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing the payout of prize balls or the variable display of special symbols even if the game balls to each winning opening win. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, a difference between the determined used setting value and the setting value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the game hall. Although recognizable forms are exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are shown in FIGS. 9-36 ( B) or a display mode (lighting mode) such as shown in FIG.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of the characteristic portion 207SG, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the set value used for determination, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and the game Although the security signal is output only once to the field management device, the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 207SG, when the set value of determination used and the set value currently stored at the head address of RAM 102 are different, CPU 103 puts pachinko gaming machine 1 in a non-playable state. Although the mode of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko game. It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the used setting value may be stored at the head address of the RAM 102, or the most unfavorable value for the player (this By setting 1) in the characterizing section 207SG of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used set value is the same (207SGS553: Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start mouth buffer value and the set value (207SGS556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 9-40(A), that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 9-42 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is checked whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (207SGS558; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display will result in a small hit at 207SGS557. (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 9-21 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" in the jackpot type determination table. , "jackpot C", which one of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before deriving a fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. For example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", then "1", if "jackpot B", then "2", and if "jackpot C", then "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the prior determination result of , and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot" at 207SGS558, when the jackpot type at 207SGS563 is "jackpot A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is confirmed. set to In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the advance to the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of kinds of symbols may be set as the confirmed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in 207SGS565, after updating and storing the set value specified in 207SGS553 in RAM 102 as the determined used set value (207SGS566), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, since the set value used for determination is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 9-31(B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. In this example, the used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing the value in the area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the used setting value and the RAM 102 can be determined when executing the first variable display. The set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) stored at the head address of the pachinko game machine 1 may be compared.

Incidentally, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 and 9-41, a mode of determining the variable display result using the variable display result determination module that executes common processing is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the comparison processing (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIG. 9-41) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the processing do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the game stop state (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use value as the result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 9-43 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and performs a CTC (counter/timer) mounted on the production control board 12. circuit) registers, etc.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception wait timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; N), the processes of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 are repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception wait timer times out.

When the command reception wait timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player is After accepting the input of information, the information stored in the RAM 122 including the number of variations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

When there is no reception of the hot start notification command (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the cold notification command (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information stored in the RAM 122 and the performance information (the number of fluctuations stored in the RAM 122 since the previous startup of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of (207SGS409), and notifies that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and performance information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. (207SGS410) RAM clear notification processing for (executing RAM clear notification). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(A), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared). The display of the notification image 207SG005M1) for notifying that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). For example, it is sufficient to notify that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

Moreover, when there is no reception of the cold start notification command (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process for notifying that an operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that a setting value is being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , the notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting value is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. The state in which the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open generally means that the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, and the store clerk or the like of the game arcade who changes or confirms the setting value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. is in a state of In other words, the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the setting value. It is conceivable that the store clerk of the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. Therefore, as the setting value changing notification and the setting value checking notification, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are used to inform the pachinko machine clerk who changes or confirms the setting value. 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321, and a second movable body initialization process for checking the operation of the second movable body 207SG322. Execute the process (207SGS414). In addition, in the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. (See Figure 9-49).

Here, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-47 and 9-48. FIG. 9-47 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing the operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIG. 9-48, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the non-detection time operation control.

The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between their origin position (first position) and effect position (second position). 2 position) and the return movement from the performance position to the origin position are the actual movement modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display or the like.

The effect control CPU 120, when the detected parts of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 when the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed, If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved from the origin position for some reason (for example, when transported or installed on the game island, or if it was not possible to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is executed, the motor is disconnected) When the return to the origin of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 cannot be confirmed or cannot be operated due to a malfunction, failure, or catching, etc., a movable body error (abnormal operation) occurs, or the vibration of the game machine causes it to move from the origin position. If it is at a position other than the origin position (for example, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position, such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 9-32) due to circumstances, etc.), return to the origin Execute non-detection operation control for Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position when the non-detection operation control is executed, the only operation is to move the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 in the direction of the origin position.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The motion control for confirming the actual motion is the same motion as the actual motion actually performed in the rendering using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body rendering executed during variable display).

Next, the control speed set when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. 9-48(A) and 9-48(B) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322. , 207SG322 at actual operating speeds. That is, for example, when the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated, even if the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, the one movement section and other movement sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same movement section, the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 The actual operating speed may differ from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, movement distance, drive mechanism, etc. of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, each movable body 207SG321 , 207SG322 are not necessarily the same. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321 and 207SG322, the size, weight, and If there are differences in operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not always the same.

As shown in FIG. 9-48 (A), when executing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the performance position, and to accelerate from the performance position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is set to a low speed between the origin position and the production position. Change from high speed to low speed. In other words, the effect control CPU120, when executing the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed Since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate at speeds within the range of , the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed Each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speed is adjusted so as to achieve the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the lowest control speed, they are operated at the lowest speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, they are operated at the maximum speed. It will be explained assuming that

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed during acceleration and deceleration of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 is the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Further, when returning to the original position after moving to the performance position, the movable body 207SG321, SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321, 207SG321. 207SG322 is reliably decelerated, and then the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (B), the effect control CPU 120, when executing the non-detection operation control, during the period of moving from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position , to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU120, the maximum speed in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control (maximum operation speed) is the speed below the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation as the second operation control (this implementation In the feature part 207SG in the form of, the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control is always set so that the speed is the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed to operate the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322.

In this case, it is unknown how far away the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. When the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 return to the origin position, the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected parts, or the movable bodies cannot be reliably detected from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged due to the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 return to the origin position and the movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 and the like may be damaged. Control.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, after executing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 changes the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. (207SGS415). If the setting value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS417. If the setting value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGS417 without executing the process of 207SGS416.

At 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If so (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not ended (207SGS419; N), proceed to 207SGS412; Determine if the flag is set (207SGS420).

In 207SGS420, if the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422) is the same process as 207SGS413. Then, the second movable body initialization process (207SGS423), which is the same process as 207SGS414, is executed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). If the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS424; N), proceed to 207SGS422. (207SGS424; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

As described above, for the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. When the game machine 1 is controlled to the set value change state or the set value confirmation state), the set value change notification and the set value confirmation in progress notification are started, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process to run. As described above, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed. After completing the operation check, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-49(A), the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing. If it is received, that is, if the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is finished after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are performed again. A movable body initialization process is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B), of the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the effect control is performed at the timing when only the first movable body initialization process is completed. When the CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 has been completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 has not yet been completed. If the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed in a state where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It's like

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command at the timing when the first movable body initialization processing has not yet ended. In other words, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed in a state in which the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process being executed are executed. Only the initialization process is executed, and the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are not executed again.

In addition, when there is no reception of the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command in 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of the error designation command (207SGS425). . If an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) is executed to notify an error indicated by the error designation command. If an error designation command is not received (207SGS425; N) , 207 SGS 403 .

As the error notification in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. good. Since the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified by the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5 in this way, the player can understand that an incorrect value is set as the setting value from the notification image 207SG005M4. , the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again in a state in which power was interrupted during the change of the set value, and the set value (determined used set value) referred to in the previous variable display is stored in the head address of the RAM 102. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the preset value. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and the error notification process (207SGS439) that can be executed after the start of the pachinko game machine 1 is completed. , there are two error notification processes.

Of these, for the error notification process (207SGS426) that can be executed when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an error that occurred when the pachinko game machine 1 is started (the Error notification processing (207SGS439) that can be executed after the notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed based on the reception of the error designation command transmitted by the pachinko gaming machine 1 The notification image 207SG005M4 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the error that occurred after the completion of the activation (reception of the error designation command sent by the processing of 207SGS554 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-41 by the CPU 103). Just do it.

Thus, in the effect control main process in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-44, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start, While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of , from the RAM 122, the performance information (the number of fluctuations since the previous startup of the pachinko game machine 1, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) ) and set value information (one of the numerical values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122 . When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the player information and performance information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. - 特許庁Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the performance information are not cleared from the RAM 122, but the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. It overwrites (updates and memorizes) the existing set value information.

That is, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting value confirmation state, or setting value change state. there is

Then, at 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the command. Start displaying the initial pattern according to the command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-45, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new setting value. If it is not set, the image display device 5 starts to display decorative patterns as initial patterns in a combination of "1", "2" and "3" from the left. Also, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays the initial symbol " 4”, “5”, and “6” are combined to start displaying the decoration pattern.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is When set, a combination of "4", "5", and "6" is used as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko game machine 1 is set with setting values that are advantageous to the player, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the image display device 5 displays "4", "5" from the left as initial symbols. , "6", but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example, "6") advantageous to the player is The initial pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 may be different depending on whether the set value is set or when a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set. Also, when a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set and when a set value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "1") is set, the speakers 8L and 8R The volume of the sound to be output, the light intensity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. may be varied.

Then, returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 sets "4" to the pre-reading regulation counter in order to regulate the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the first 4 fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processes.

The effect control CPU 120 first executes start notification processing for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started (207SGS431). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . If it is the first interruption from the startup of the pachinko game machine 1, it identifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, It selects the activation notification process table corresponding to the received command and starts the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command. After starting the start-notifying process timer, the pachinko game machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-notifying process timer and the start-notifying process table by executing start-notifying processing in subsequent interrupts. Notification should be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in this embodiment, the command received at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is either a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. Depending on whether there is, the mode of start notification of the pachinko game machine 1 is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-46, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives a new When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound A is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The timing for starting light emission of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the timing for starting output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. It may be different from the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Also, when the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when the new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the output sound B is output for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The 60-second emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 and the 30-second emission start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

That is, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, the effect control CPU 120 emits light from the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. It includes both executing the output of B.

Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R emit light for 20 seconds. Then, the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). The timing for starting light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the timing for starting outputting the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing for starting displaying the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when the set value change end notification command is received, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

Incidentally, the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the pachinko game machine 1 is started up using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall or each machine counter, and the pachinko game machine 1 starts up. A signal that can specify that the pachinko game machine 1 has been started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device as a start notification when the pachinko game machine 1 is started.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, the device for executing the activation notification is partly common regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of the hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. (in any case, light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is hot. Depending on whether the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state, the device that executes the start notification differs (for example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a cold start, the image display device 5 , a message image may be displayed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a signal may be output from the external output terminal to the management device, etc.).

In addition, depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state, the notification mode in each device that executes start notification may be changed. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are illuminated while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state. In some cases, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 may be illuminated.

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the game machine frame 207SG003 is open, so sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko game machine 1). If three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers). Therefore, sound may be output from all speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as "setting changing", while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When the program is started by the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as "RAM has been cleared."

Furthermore, when the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a plurality of external output terminals, the terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be changed according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is displayed as the setting value changing notification. A signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over the period), and after the change of the set value is completed, the signal is output to the management device from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear as RAM clear notification. When the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started, it is only necessary to output a signal from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as RAM clear notification.

When the external output terminal is commonly used for each notification, the timing of outputting the signal to the management device may be varied according to each notification.

As described above, in the activation notification process, the mode of activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs according to the received command, but the present invention is not limited to this. may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 start-up notification is exemplified in a form in which it is executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if any of these hot start notification command, cold start notification command, setting value confirmation end notification command, and setting value change end notification command is received, the pachinko machine 1 A command that does not execute activation notification may be provided.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, as the initialization effect in the present invention, different modes of startup notification are executed according to the command received when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, or the pachinko game machine 1 Although a form in which different combinations of decoration patterns are displayed on the image display device 5 according to the command received when the is activated, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decoration patterns may all be different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only some of them may be the same.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG in this embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, when activated by cold start, when activated by setting change state, when activated by setting confirmation state also exemplifies a mode of executing start notification, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start or when it is started in a setting confirmation state, these start notifications may not be executed.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 9-51, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (207SGS441). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the system shifts to loop processing in which no processing is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

Returning to FIG. 9-43, the effect control CPU 120 then analyzes the received effect control command and performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122 . In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 9-8) is the effect control command saved in the buffer area.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process processing, the display control of the image display device 5 is executed by selecting the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) among the processes corresponding to the control state.

Next, a production random number update process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of a counter for generating a production random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number (207SGS435), a player information input process (207SGS436) for accepting input of player information, and a game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information, a performance information totalization process (207SGS438) for totalizing performance information, and an error notification process (207SGS439) are executed. After that, the process proceeds to S52.

In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a password (a password generated by an external server in which the game information of the player is stored in advance) by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone, receives the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122 . Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big wins, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored each time the variable display, the big win game, and the super reach are executed.

In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and generates the two-dimensional code. is displayed on the image display device 5 . After displaying the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

In the production information tallying process, the production control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as information for production each time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed. do.

In the error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received from the CPU 103 . If an error designation command has been received, the error notification corresponding to the received error designation command is executed.

Next, the effect control process processing in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-52, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451). When the value of the prefetching regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after executing the prefetching notice setting process (S161), it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U. The pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed to update the pending memory display number and the display mode of the pending memory display according to the value of the pending memory number and the pending display flag stored in the start winning command buffer 207SG194A. , S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag.

In addition, when the value of the prefetch regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452 ). If the value of the effect control process flag is one of "0", "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), the pending display update process (207SGS454) is executed and S170 is executed according to the effect control process flag. To S177 (see FIG. 7) to execute one of the processing, if the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), -1 the value of the prefetch regulation counter (207SGS453), Hold display update processing (207SGS454) is executed and one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is executed according to the effect control process flag. By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 immediately after starting, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment, based on the pachinko game machine 1 is activated, the production control CPU120 executes the production control main processing and the production control process processing, four times variable display However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 starts the start winning determination process (Fig. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

As described above, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, based on the pachinko game machine 1 becoming ready for a game, execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The light intensity of the effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, etc. may be set to the factory shipment state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a form in which the pending display notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the prefetch notice effect, For example, an effect of displaying a specific background image on the image display device 5, an effect of moving a specific movable body, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an effect of emitting light from the game effect lamp 9 may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Especially in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is plural. Compared to the case where it is provided, there is no need to execute the determination of whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state) more than once. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to perform control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, the above-described hit determination value With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are set so as to be continuous numerical ranges. , Whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values included in the range is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, while the second special figure display result The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice). is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, whether it is controlled to the big hit game state When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value, and the small winning game state is controlled. When determining whether or not, the random number MR1 is from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variation special figure. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

In addition, the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 . Then, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the CPU 103 in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment stores in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). In addition to reading out the setting value, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and enter the big hit game state It is determined whether or not to control. That is, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read setting values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, a setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time the variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read setting values. . When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the setting values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read setting value and the previous variable display result. The set value read out from the RAM 102 (determination used set value) is compared with the set value read out from the RAM 102 for determination. Since the error notification is executed by the image displayed on the display device 5 (see FIG. 9-50), it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of an inappropriate set value. can. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, game parlor staff and the like can quickly deal with abnormal set values.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used setting value every time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, the effect An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-40 to 9-42, the CPU 103 uses a variable display result determination module common to when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is judged, part of the processing can be shared between the execution of the winning random number judgment and the execution of the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, if the fluctuation special figures are the same, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the small hit Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 setting the display result determination table according to), so the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state. When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, when 1 (set value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-17 to 9-20, a form is illustrated in which the jackpot reference value is set to the lowest value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big-hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination values.

This embodiment also includes invention 207SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since the setting state is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, it is not possible to appropriately notify the setting state. There was a problem. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is established (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When it is in the setting state, the information display section displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the information display section that executes variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, notifies that it is in the setting state. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When the confirmation condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started), the setting means sets to a confirmation state (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG. 9-33) in which the set values that have been set can be confirmed,
When it is in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that enables recognition of the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the information display section that executes the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, notifies that the confirmation state is in effect. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of Invention 207SG,
The display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-37). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when it is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. different parts)
According to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 4 of invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can be recognized as the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display A part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the variable display section.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display unit is composed of a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. part),
As a display that can be recognized that it is the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display units are displayed in a lighting state (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B The part that lights up all segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game by shooting game media into game areas (e.g., left game area 207SG002L and right game area 207SG002R),
The information display unit includes a shooting direction reporting unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) that reports the shooting direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the firing direction notification unit displays a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37(A), The part that blinks the right-handed lamp 207SG132 in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the shooting direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to means 7 of invention 207SG,
Equipped with a pending storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information related to variable display as pending information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that enables recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the holding display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), the setting A portion that blinks all the segments that constitute the first suspension display 207SG025A and the second suspension display 207SG025B in the value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
According to this feature, a suitable notification can be made in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 8 of invention 207SG,
a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which game media can enter and a second state in which game media are less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number of times notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device becomes the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, the number of times notification unit displays a display that allows recognition of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (A), setting A part where only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit in the value change state or the set value confirmation state)
According to the game machine characterized by the following, according to this characteristic, it is possible to make a suitable notification in the number-of-times notification unit.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 8 of invention 207SG,
game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of address F002 of RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means when the power is turned on;
with
The game control means is
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including that the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) is established. When the game information is being erased, an initialization process (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 9-31(A)) for initializing the game information storage means is executed. is executable and
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial state executed when the first condition is satisfied. initialization processing and common initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a portion capable of executing RAM clear processing and set value change processing),
The state information is not erased when either the first condition or the second condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-31(A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). part that does not)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be shared between when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. The initialization processing based on the state information can be accurately executed while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

This embodiment also includes invention 208SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state cannot be appropriately ignored. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of Invention 208SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
Information display unit (for example, game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 9-30), the value set by the setting means is changed. Transition to a setting state in which setting can be performed (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-37B). , If an error occurs more than the set value, all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display area where the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since the fact that the operation has been performed is notified by the display, it is possible to appropriately notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition has been met.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of Invention 208SG,
The game machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error related to a storage area in which at least the set value is stored (for example, an error greater than or equal to the set value). It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and that the set value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power failure occurs before the new set values changed in the setting state are determined, an error related to the storage area storing the set values will not occur at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if there is no error, a display that can specify that an error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is restored from a power failure during setting change as shown in FIG. 9-37(B), the first A part that blinks all the segments that constitute the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, the setting value needs to be reset due to the power failure occurring before the setting value is determined without providing a new error. It is possible to preferably notify that it is.

This embodiment also includes invention 209SG described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting value changing function, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent No. 6209653, for example, discloses a pachinko game machine having information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to the game value to be awarded. However, when applying the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 to the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, the display unit for confirming the set value and the information display means There was a problem that the cost of the gaming machine could not be reduced if each was provided separately. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (e.g., a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a big winning opening, etc.) The part where prize balls are paid out by doing) and
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, the base shown in FIG. information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying
with
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the pachinko game If the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the setting value can be displayed in the setting value confirmation state),
The number of display units used differs between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-35, the display monitor 207SG029 has a base value When displayed, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D are used, and when the set values are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display section Part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value. Since there is no need to provide them individually, the cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error has occurred in at least the storage area storing the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36(B), When an abnormal set value error occurs, the portion where "E."
When the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed, the number of the display units used is the same (for example, FIGS. 9-35 (A) and 9-36 (B) , the display monitor 207SG029 displays the base value and the occurrence of an abnormal error on the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display. 207SG029D), and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to are different error information.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be lit independently (for example, the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D each have eight display sections). segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means at the time of power-on satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that the clear switch is ON), the information display means displays the information displayed on the small screen constituting each display unit. All the display portions are turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-36A, the first display portion 207SG029A, the second display portion 207SG029B, the third display portion 207SG029C, the fourth display portion 207SG029D repeats all lighting and all lights out of all segments (flashing))
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
The information display means displays the set value information without entering the all lighting display state (for example, when the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies the predetermined condition). As shown in FIG. 9-32, when the CPU 103 executes the setting value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029)
According to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.

In addition, this embodiment also includes invention 210SG described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a movable body confirmation operation based on a setting value change operation, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189349. However, in the pachinko game machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-189349, if the confirming operation of the movable body is executed while the set value is being changed, the operator may miss the confirming operation. Therefore, it is conceivable that the confirmation operation is executed again after the operation for changing the set value is completed. At this timing, a new operation for confirming the movable body is started, and there is a problem that the movable body may perform an unintended movement. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as the game machine according to the means 1 of the invention 210SG for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When a specific condition is established, the setting means shifts to a setting state in which setting values can be set (for example, as shown in FIG. 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value change process),
The control means is
confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally; It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-49, the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including operation confirmation operation control, and the actual operation from the timing of receiving the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing a checking operation by the checking operation control when shifting to the setting state, the checking operation control due to the completion of the setting state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 9-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine according to the means 2 of invention 210SG,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
operably provided movable bodies (for example, the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322);
Control means for controlling the motion of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value change processing shown in FIG. 9-32) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) ,
A game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
with
When the confirmation condition is established, the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, cleared when the pachinko game machine 1 is started A portion where the CPU 103 executes set value confirmation processing when the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform a confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally , and can be executed when the confirmation state is entered and when the confirmation state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. From the timing when the start notification command is received, the first movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing are sequentially executed, and the setting value change end notification command and setting value confirmation A part that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing when the end notification command is received),
If the confirming state ends while the movable body is performing a confirming operation by the confirming operation control when shifting to the confirming state, the confirming operation control due to the completion of the confirming state is not executed (for example, , As shown in FIG. 9-49(C), during the second movable body initialization process being executed based on the effect control CPU 120 receiving a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command When the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. Portion where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not positioned at the predetermined origin position, a return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation for positioning the movable body at the origin position is performed in the confirmation operation. When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the return operation (for example, the first movable In the body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after finishing the non-detection automatic operation control)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended action.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the operation status of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-49 (C), the first movable If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during execution of the body initialization processing, the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing is newly executed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. part where body initialization processing is not executed) On the other hand, if the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the confirmation operation control is executed according to the completion of the setting state or the confirmation state (for example, FIG. 9- As shown in 49 (B), the first movable body initialization process based on the effect control CPU 120 has received the set value change start notification command and the set value check start notification command is completed, and the second movable body is initialized. If a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of processing, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly performed after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. and the part that executes sequentially)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as the game machine according to the fifth aspect of invention 210SG,
comprising a plurality of said movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first facial initialization process and the second movable body initialization process),
If the setting state or the confirmation state ends when the confirmation operation has not been completed for all the movable bodies, the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation has been completed satisfies a predetermined condition. Confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. If a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the Part where the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, if the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-49(B), the effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. When the first movable body initialization process is completed and a set value change notification command or a set value confirmation notification command is received during execution of the second movable body initialization process, the second movable body initialization process is executed. After the end of the part where the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are newly executed in order)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation status of the confirmation operation.

The characteristic portion 207SG in this embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

For example, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the game information display portion 207SG200 is replaced with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the normal A pattern display 207SG020, a normal pattern holding display 207SG025C, a round display 207SG131, a right-handed lamp 207SG132, a variable probability lamp 207SG133, and a time-saving lamp 207SG134 were exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, The game information display unit 207SG200 may or may not include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process (set value change state) and the set value check process (set value check state). 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are exemplified in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the set value change process. The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners depending on whether there is one or when the set value confirmation process is being executed. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is any.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the second The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although the form to be made different was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lighting mode) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result, these first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol It is not necessary to turn on some of all the segments that constitute the display device 207SG004B.

In addition, in the characterizing part 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round indicator 207SG131 which are configured with the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. 1 segment is lit, and all segments that constitute the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B are exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and configuration of the first suspension indicator 207SG025A and the second suspension indicator 207SG025B Blinking of all segments to be performed may not be performed, or may be performed only partially.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. is not limited to this, and unless the combination corresponds to the jackpot type shown in FIG. There may be.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above embodiment, the form of executing the notification of the set value abnormal error using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B was exemplified, but the present invention is based on this. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 may be individually provided with an error notification LED, and the occurrence of the setting value abnormality error may be notified by lighting or blinking the LED.

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the form provided with the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value on the pachinko gaming machine 1 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game The machine 1 may not be equipped with the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko game machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, it is sufficient to newly provide display means for displaying the setting values (or provisional setting values) in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is executed. Although the form of determining whether or not to execute has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute new first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing It may be determined according to the operation distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game, but this invention. is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round display, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right strike lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game if it is possible to notify that the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. .

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, A mode for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by setting the round indicator 207SG0131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, and the like in a mode different from that during the game, but this invention. is not limited to this, and the ``mode different from that during the game'' may include a different flashing cycle, a different brightness, a different light emission color of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are started from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change start notification command or the set value check start notification command. As the processing, an example has been exemplified in which the operation control when each movable body is not detected and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. From the time of receiving the command and the setting value confirmation start notification command, the operation control at the time of non-detection of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command , actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, The form in which the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state is exemplified by lighting or blinking the round indicator 207SG131 and the right strike lamp 207SG132, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension display device 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display section 207SG200) to explain that the lighting and blinking of the right hitting lamp 207SG132 are performed. By doing so, a store clerk or the like in a game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first suspension display device 207SG025A, the second suspension It is possible to prevent the lighting and blinking of the indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 from being misidentified as a failure of the pachinko game machine 1 or the like.

In addition, in the game control main processing of the characterizing part 207SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although the form of executing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y), or when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ;Y).

In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. range) is provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, FIGS. 9-53 (A) and 9-53 (B) 2, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the game state or set value.

In addition, if the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. , and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Further, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 9-53 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value standard value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-54, Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is the minimum value of the jackpot determination value (in the example shown in FIG. 9-54, 64990 for set value 1, 64974 for set value 2, and 64954 for set value 3) or more. When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further varied by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is greater than or equal to 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the big hit determination value Common numerical range and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, If 2 to 6 are set as setting values in pachinko machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It can be determined whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-53, when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit decision value increases Since it is sufficient to determine whether to control, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

Also, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 reduces the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-53 and 9-54, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention is this However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

Further, in the characterizing section 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example is given in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in 9-55 and FIG. 9-56, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

In addition, when the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit determination value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the highest number of values), a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 9-55, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 9-56, in any case The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, while the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the number is exemplified in a different form, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same as.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set in the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. there is In addition, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, the numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, as with the characteristic portion 207SG described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value And in a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, each set value is set. Although the form of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A common numerical range may be established. Even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, when setting a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56 A range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical range of , the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value On the other hand, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, so the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 9-55 and 9-56, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but this invention It is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

Further, in the characterizing portion 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or not common. It is determined whether or not to control to a big winning game state based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small winning determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the characteristic portion 207SG. It may be determined whether to control to a small hit game state or not. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). You may judge whether to control to a state.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic part 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 10-1 is a flow chart showing setting value change processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-1, the same processing as in FIG. 9-32 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop end process (10FS002) after executing the process of clearing the set value changing flag (207SGSa066). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. After the game stop end process, the display of the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-32 is performed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing setting value confirmation processing in the feature part 10F. In FIG. 10-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-33 is given the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. This game stop start process is a process common to the game stop start process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop start process, lighting of all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off at 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes game stop end processing (10FS002). Details of the game stop end process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. This game stop end process is a process common to the game stop end process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop end process, the display of the set values on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, processing similar to that shown in FIG. 9-33 is performed.

(Regarding various timers)
Next, game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure the time and period of the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops clocking by these timers. These timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning ball device 7 having the big winning hole. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the big winning door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for timing the interval period between rounds during the jackpot gaming state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by using the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer is a V-variable game machine that controls the game state after the jackpot game is over based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid that is controlled to the open state and the closed state provided in front of the sensor that detects the V probability change. In the V probability variable gaming machine, the V cover is in an open state in a predetermined round among a plurality of rounds. Such a region where the V lid is open is called a V winning region. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by using the V lid open time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning to determine that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 controls the game ball that has passed through the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A game ball that has passed through the switch) is also determined as a V prize within the effective period. The CPU 103 counts the validity period of the V prize during which the V prize is determined to be valid by the V pass waiting time timer.

The electric chew opening time timer is a timer that measures the opening time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is in the closed state by an electric chew opening time timer. .

The special figure fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of variable display of special symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol variation time timer. The normal pattern fluctuation time timer is a timer for timing the execution time of the variable display of normal patterns. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbols to the end of the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal fluctuation time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which a fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that a big win is controlled at the start of a big win. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare effect is executed as an effect operation for announcing the start of the big win game state after the big win symbols are stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which an ending effect is executed, which is a period for reporting the end of the big win when the big win ends. The ending period is a period during which the jackpot end process is executed, and is a period during which the ending effect as a effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 has a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a normal figure fluctuation stop period timer, etc. as timers other than the timers described above. The special symbol fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started by the special symbol variation stop period timer. The normal pattern fluctuation stop period timer is a timer that measures the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next normal pattern is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started by the normal symbol fluctuation stop period timer.

(Game stop start process)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-3 is a flow chart showing the game stop start process in the feature part 10F. First, in the game stop start process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010). At 10FS010, if the attacker open time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker open time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). At 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is operating (10FS012). At 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). At 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not operating (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew opening time timer is operating (10FS014). At 10FS014, if the electric chew opening time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the electric chew opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016). At 10FS016, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS016; Y), the normal pattern fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not in operation (10FS016; N), it is determined whether or not the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017). At 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). At 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the processing ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation (10FS019). At 10FS019, if other timers are in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timers in operation are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process of disabling the firing of the batting operation handle 30, a process of disabling various sensors provided in the starting gate, the general winning gate 10, the out gate, and the passage gate 41, a processing of disabling the detection of various errors, This includes processing for invalidating the payout of prize balls. Other processes (10FS021) invalidate various processes and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop end processing in the characteristic portion 10F will be described. FIG. 10-4 is a flow chart showing the game stop end processing in the characterizing portion 10F. First, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker release time timer is stopped in the game stop end process (10FS030). At 10FS030, if the attacker release time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker release time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether or not the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). At 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether or not the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032). At 10FS032, if the V lid open time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the V lid open time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). At 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passing waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the processing is terminated.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the electric chew open time timer is stopped (10FS034). At 10FS034, if the electric chew opening time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the electric chew opening time timer that is in operation is activated (10FS040), and the processing ends. If the electric chew open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer being stopped is operated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the normal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036). At 10FS036, if the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the stopped normal pattern fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). At 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). At 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped (10FS039). At 10FS039, if other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the other stopped timers are activated (10FS040), and the process is terminated. If other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, processing to enable firing of the batting operation handle 30, processing to enable various sensors provided in the starting port, general winning port 10, out port, and passage gate 41, processing to enable detection of various errors, This includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. Various processes are validated by the other process (10FS041), and the game is normally executed.

(Regarding the effects of characteristic parts)
As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 determines the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted from the setting confirmation state, and the game progresses. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is changed. Restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the end. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the progress of the game due to the subtraction of the inter-round interval period in the setting confirmation state. can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V prize, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by the game progressing due to the subtraction of the effective period of the V winning prize in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 determines the effective period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. is stopped, and the effective period of the electric chew open time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is ready to enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from being lost.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. is stopped, and the counting of the effective period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal pattern is being executed. is stopped, and the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer is resumed based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, Based on the termination of the setting confirmation state, the fanfare time timer is restarted to count the validity period. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the execution of the fanfare effect and the progress of the game in the setting confirmation state. .

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the ending time timer based on the setting confirmation state being controlled while the ending effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the validity period of the ending time timer is restarted. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the ending effect in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. The timing of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. In this way, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention may be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 10F will be described below.

A gaming machine (so-called type 1 gaming machine) that shifts to a big win game state based on the result of variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns has been explained, but a special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area has been described. A game machine (so-called type 2 game machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the fact that a game ball wins (V prize) in a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied in a game machine (one type and two type mixing machine) that combines the When the starting winning to the second starting winning port is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the determination result of the big win is obtained, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the result of the big win display becomes the big win game. The game control similar to the big hit based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening, such as being controlled to the state is executed. On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit, the small hit determination is executed, and when the determination result is a small hit, the variation display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes a small hit game. A special variable winning ball device for a small hit is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When a game ball is received by a special variable winning ball device for small winning in a small winning game state and the game ball enters a special winning opening (V area) and is detected by a predetermined switch, variable for big winning. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-type jackpot game control in which the winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, a small winning time timer may be provided for measuring the effective period for determining that the game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is valid. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch with a delay even after the special variable winning ball device is changed from the open state to the closed state by the small winning time timer is a winning within the effective period. The CPU 103 measures the period during which the winning to the special winning opening is effectively determined by the small winning time timer. Then, the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the small winning game state is set, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. , You may make it resume time-measurement of the effective period of a small hit time timer. In this way, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the small winning game state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. good. For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on control to the setting change state when the state is advantageous to the player, and stops various timers based on the termination of the setting change state. may be restarted.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbols results in a big win display result or a loss display result. Specifically, when the variable display of the special design results in a big hit display, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state When the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special pattern is displaced and the display result is displayed, even if it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer may not be stopped. . In this manner, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player with respect to the big win display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, but the timer is stopped in order not to disadvantage the player with respect to the loss display result. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big win display result or a losing display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the loss display result, during the execution of the variable display of the loss, the pattern stop period was reached without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Sometimes, it may be made to stop the special figure fluctuation stop period timer.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or the set value is disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the setting value is advantageous to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, various timers are stopped, but when the setting value is unfavorable to the player and the setting confirmation state is reached, the various timers are started. You may choose not to stop.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions related to the characteristic portion 10F described above. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of setting values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set setting values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to shift to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state,
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
A specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid for a game medium that has entered the specific area For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on this, the expiration time of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 11F)
The characteristic portion 11F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew open time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew open time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. Stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on this, the expiration time of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 12F)
The characteristic portion 12F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display is derived as a result. hand,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Identification information (e.g., special design) variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display (e.g., CPU103 timed by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable winning timing means (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker release time timer) for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state;
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state. and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from the time the variable display of the identification information stops until the next variable display starts (for example, the CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Resuming the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on that, restart the timing of the validity period of the ending time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of the Invention Regarding Characteristic Portion 13F)
The characteristic portion 13F may include the following inventions. Conventionally, there has been a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of stages of set values based on a setting change operation, and can execute control in an advantageous state for the player based on the set set values. rice field. In such a pachinko game machine, in the setting confirmation process for confirming the setting value, it was possible to move to the next process only when all the main processes being executed were completed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 reference).

However, in the case of the game machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to check the settings immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed. couldn't. In order to solve such problems, the characteristic portion 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information and is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived; ,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 performs setting value change processing) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) that have different advantages for the player according to the setting change operation. part to execute) and
A state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm which setting value is set;
Normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and derives a display result based on the passage of the game medium through a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41);
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a normal figure fluctuation time timer),
The normal variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the normal identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal pattern is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the valid period of the normal pattern fluctuation time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the player is not disadvantaged due to the execution of the variable display of the normal identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above,
a variable winning device (e.g., special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (e.g., open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (e.g., closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game executing means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., round) a plurality of times to change the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
Variable winning timing means for timing the period for changing the variable winning device to the first state (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an attacker open time timer),
The variable winning timing means stops timing of the period based on the fact that the variable winning device is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is completed. (For example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state, and the timing of the period of the attacker open time timer and restarts the timing of the period of the attacker release time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above,
Stop timing means for timing the period from after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started (for example, CPU 103 clocked by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer),
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on the control to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped and before the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is stopped. Restart the timing of the period based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started). Stop the timing of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer, and restart the timing of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state to the start of the next variable display. It is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Predetermined game timing means for timing the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game (e.g., inter-round interval period) (e.g., CPU 103 that measures by an inter-round interval period timer),
The predetermined game timing means stops timing of the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game based on the control to the setting confirmation state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends restarts the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on what has been done).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game in the setting confirmation state. It is possible to prevent people from being at a disadvantage.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (2) to (4) above,
a specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which game media can enter;
Special state control means (e.g., CPU 103) that controls to a special state (e.g., probability variable state) that increases the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific area;
Specific timing means (for example, valid period of V winning) for measuring valid period (for example, valid period of V winning) after a predetermined condition is established (for example, valid period of V winning) is determined to be valid For example, it further includes a CPU 103) that measures time by a V passage waiting time timer,
The specific timing means stops timing of the effective period when the setting confirmation state is entered while the predetermined condition is satisfied, and terminates the effective period when the setting confirmation state ends. Resumes timing (for example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state during the effective period of the V winning, restarts the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be performed immediately, and the game progresses by subtracting the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. It is possible to prevent it from becoming

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for performing variable display of normal identification information (for example, normal symbols) and deriving and displaying the display result based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area (for example, passage gate 41); ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, normal game hit), normal variable winning means (for example, open state) in which game media can enter for a predetermined period , variable winning ball device 6B),
A normal variable winning timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by an electric chew opening time timer) for timing a period in which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state;
The normal variable winning timing means stops clocking of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. (For example, the CPU 103 restarts the effective period of the electronic chew opening time timer based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state and is controlled to the setting confirmation state. It stops the clocking, and restarts the clocking of the effective period of the electric chew open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting confirmation can be immediately performed, and the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in a state in which the normal variable winning means can enter in the setting confirmation state, which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

(7) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
The identification information (for example, special symbols) is variably displayed, and when the specific display result (for example, the big win display result) is derived, the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state) is controlled,
Variable display timing means for timing the execution period of variable display of identification information (for example, CPU103 clocked by special figure fluctuation time timer),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and stops timing of the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the timing of the validity period of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting Based on the end of the state, the timing of the valid period of the special figure fluctuation time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the execution of the variable display of the identification information in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. can be prevented.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (7) above,
A start notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period;
A start notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the start notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by a fanfare time timer),
The start notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on control to the setting confirmation state while the fanfare effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on which the fanfare time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the start notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for executing an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) for notifying the end of the advantageous state over a predetermined period;
End notification effect timing means for timing the execution period of the end notification effect (for example, CPU 103 clocked by an ending time timer),
The end notification effect timing means stops timing of the period based on control to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period is stopped based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of the effective period of the ending time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is terminated. based on this, the expiration time of the ending time timer is restarted).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the execution of the end notification performance in the setting confirmation state and the progress of the game. be able to.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, small hit game state) based on the fact that the variable display result has become a special display result (for example, small hit display result);
a special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows game media to enter in the special state;
A special area (for example, a special winning opening) provided in the special winning device and into which game media can enter,
Based on the entry of the game medium into the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A special timing means (for example, a CPU 103 clocked by a small hit time timer) for timing a valid period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area in the special state is valid,
The special timing means stops timing of the effective period based on the control to the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts timing of the effective period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state (for example, , the CPU 103 stops the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the small winning game state, and based on the end of the setting confirmation state, Restart the counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to the progress of the game due to the execution of the control in the special state in the setting confirmation state. can be prevented.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. Characteristic part 40F has the characteristic about the processing of the production control command during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Noise caused by static electricity or the like may occur during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, an effect control command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 unintentionally. Processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.
FIG. 11-1 is a diagram illustrating the effect control commands in the characteristic portion 40F in this embodiment. In FIG. 11-1, some effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 9-8(A). The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands that indicate the contents of winning determination results such as jackpot type determination and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Among them, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big win will be made and the judgment result of the type of the big win among the winning determination results. Also, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number value among the winning determination results.

Various production control commands shown in FIG. 11-1 are transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103 . By receiving various production control commands, the production control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the production control CPU 120 based on the production control command will be explained.

(Regarding processing based on the variation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbols, the image display device 5 may be provided with a regular small pattern in which the decoration pattern is reduced. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby always performing the variation display of the small symbols to be displayed.

(Regarding processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As patterns to be displayed in a variable manner, a decorative pattern, a special pattern, and a fourth pattern may be provided as the fourth pattern next to the normal pattern. The fourth pattern is a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first and second special patterns) are fluctuating. Is displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, an effect is performed such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or the movable body completely or partially occupies the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when a shielding effect is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current variable display is being performed. The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first variation start command, thereby performing the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(Regarding the processing based on the specified command during the opening of the big prize mouth)
During the jackpot game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the closed state (second state), making it difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to be in an open state based on the reception of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning hole. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening.

(Regarding processing based on the first start winning designation command and the second starting winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first starting opening winning designation command, thereby the first suspension information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. display a hold indication corresponding to In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second starting opening winning designation command, so that the second effect stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 Display a pending display corresponding to the pending information.

(Regarding processing based on symbol designation command and variation type designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 performs a win-time flash effect and a win-time pending change effect based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. The win-time flash effect is a effect in which the lamps provided around the first start opening are illuminated when a start-up win occurs. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for flash performance at the time of winning on the basis of the degree of expectation of a big hit based on hold information by a symbol designating command or a variation type designating command. Then, when the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control emits red light for a game with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, and emits white light for a game with a low degree of expectation. control is executed so that the lamp does not emit light. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a flash effect at the time of winning and a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only light is emitted and sound is not output.

The pending change effect at the time of winning is an effect of changing the display mode of the pending display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the usual mode. A performance control CPU 120 draws a lottery for a winning pending change performance on the basis of the degree of expectation for a big hit based on the pending information by a symbol designation command or a variation type designation command. Then, when the lottery is won, the pending display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, red, green, and blue are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation for a big hit, and in the case of losing the lottery or a change in loss that does not involve reach, the suspension display is displayed in white in the normal mode. . In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation along with the winning pending change effect. It should be noted that control may be performed so that only the hold change does not output the sound.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes a win-time pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type designation command. It should be noted that only one of the winning-time flash effect and the winning-time pending change effect may be executed. Also, when a prize is won, an effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting sound.

Next, the production control main processing executed in the characteristic portion 40F will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flow chart showing the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 40F. In FIG. 11-2, the same processing as in FIG. 9-43 is assigned the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is partially omitted. In FIG. 11-2, the processes related to 207SGS413-207SGS415 and 207SGS417-207SGS424 in FIG. 9-43 are deleted, and the sub-side game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set value change start notification command or a set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). If the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the setting value is changed. Setting value-related notification processing for notifying that operation is in progress (setting value changing notification) or that setting values are being checked (setting value checking notification) is executed (207SGS412). In the setting value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting change value is being changed and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After executing the set value related notification process in 207SGS412, the sub-side game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop the game. Processing is performed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). If the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), proceed to 207SGS412, and if the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y) goes to 207SGS427.

FIG. 11-3 is a flow chart showing sub-side game stop processing in the characteristic part 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 . Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command is received (40FS010). If it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command is received. If it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 by discarding the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent the execution of controls that do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby controlling the variable display of decorative patterns and the constant variable display of small patterns by operating the image display device 5. can be prevented from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer, and determines whether or not the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds during the jackpot game state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can prevent it from running. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning hole designation command is received. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the first pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning hole designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for specifying the second start winning opening has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second starting winning hole designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to display the pending display of the second pending information by operating the image display device 5. can do. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received. If it is determined that the design designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the design designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning by controlling the light emission of the lamp. Further, the effect control CPU 120 cancels the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby preventing execution of the winning pending change effect by operating the image display device 5.例文帳に追加. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the variation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 cancels the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so as not to execute the win-time flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent execution of the pending change effect at the time of winning by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the test command is received. Here, the test command is a command that is sent directly to the effect control board 12 from a command sending device for checking the state of the screen and the state of the character that is provided in the game machine at the time of factory shipment. . When transmitting test commands, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to test command transmission is connected to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. If it is determined that the test command has been received, control according to the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on receiving a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this manner, processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

At 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, commands as shown in FIG. 11-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. If it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from executing the effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. After that, the process ends.

(Regarding the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if the variation pattern specification command is received when the setting change state is controlled. Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern specification command even if it receives the variation pattern specification command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state, so that the variation pattern specification command Do not perform receive-based control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting change state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command when being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting change state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening open designation command even if it receives the special winning opening open designation command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Control based on the reception of the specified command during the opening of the special prize opening is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting change state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first start winning opening designation command and the second start winning opening designation command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Since the mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start prize mouth designation command and the second start prize mouth designation command is not executed. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting change state, so based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designation command and the variation type command when it is controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not execute control. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent malfunction of predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but then discards the received command like 40FS021. In this way, even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning. Further, since information is not left by discarding the received command, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in Fig. 11-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, setting is made to display an image notifying the setting change state, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. to display an image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set. In this way, it is possible to indicate that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is being controlled, and even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5, etc. It is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 11-3, even when being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, control according to the test command is executed. In this way, the operation of the predetermined rendering means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command can be executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(Regarding modified examples of characteristic parts)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention may be applied to the present invention. included. Modifications of the characteristic portion 40F will be described below.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is established. For example, an initialization command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if the production control command other than the command related to the setting change or setting confirmation is received, the processing based on the production control command is not executed. explained. However, the processing based on the fact that the production control command is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image is visually displayed according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. As for the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the channel other than the channel for outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the received command is executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, when it is controlled in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a command is received, it may not be analyzed.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the winning lamp have been described as predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be anything as long as the effect control means 120 executes it based on the reception of the command. For example, an operation means operated by a player or a movable member provided in a game machine may be used as the predetermined presentation means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member moves due to the reception of a predetermined command, the command for executing these operations is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even if the command is executed, it is sufficient to execute control to discard the command.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than a command for terminating the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can control not to.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 may be controlled to operate, a lamp provided in the game machine may emit light, or a sound may be output from a speaker. In such a case, when a command related to the lamp or speaker is received, the command may be discarded so that these effect means do not operate during the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the advance notice effect is executed based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command has been described. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when a command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern The advance notice effect may be executed based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command should be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, based on the reception of the symbol designation command and the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed. Then, various advance notices may not be executed by judging that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of actually judging whether or not the advance notice can be executed. Also, when executing a pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning a prize, a notice lottery is executed based on receiving a symbol designation command or a change type command during the setting change state or setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has ended at the timing when the notice is actually started, the notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416; Y). In this way, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, once an irregular command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, even if a restriction is imposed so as not to receive another irregular command thereafter. good.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration relating to a characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to another characteristic portion. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. In this embodiment, as described above (description of the characteristic portion 207SG), in a game machine capable of changing the set value, a variable display executed after being controlled to a predetermined game state (for example, a high base state) It is characterized in that the ratio of the selected variation pattern differs according to the number of times.

(Display result judgment)
FIG. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the low probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-1(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each set value (1 to 6) is provided. ) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table to execute the big hit determination.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1, which is a random number for special figure display result determination, is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and when the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is In the case of variable display, the probability of hitting the jackpot is lower (1/199.8) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. to be elected. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/199.8) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of non-probability variation, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/188.3) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/188.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/178.1) than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/178.1) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/164.7) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/164.7) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/149.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/149.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of low probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/134.0) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/134.0) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at the time when the variable display is started in the low probability state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 12-1(A) to 12-1(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

FIG. 12B is a diagram showing an example of the display result determination table referred to in the high probability state. As shown in FIGS. 12-2(A) to (F), a display result determination table corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6) is provided. ) is referred to the corresponding display result determination table to execute the big hit determination.

As shown in FIG. 12-2 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol In the case of variable display, the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/50) than when the set values are ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'' and ``6''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/50) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/47.1) than when it is "1". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/47.1) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/44.5) than in the case of "1" and "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/44.5) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/41.2) than in the case of "1", "2", and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/41.2) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/37.3) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/37.3) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 6 at the time of high probability, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/33.5) than in the case of "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/33.5) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at the time when the variable display is to be started in the high accuracy state, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big win shown in F) is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 14-2(A) to 14-2(F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIG. 12-1 and FIG. The determination of the big hit may be performed using a common table for the case of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display regardless of the variation special symbol designating buffer. .

In this embodiment, six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Judgement of jackpot type)
FIG. 12-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) stored in the ROM 101, and FIG. 12-3 (B) is a jackpot type stored in the ROM 101 It is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table (for the second special symbol). Of these, FIG. 12-3 (A) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 12-3 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the type of jackpot is set to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", "10R normal jackpot [50 times]", "10R normal jackpot [100 times]", It is a table referred to for determining any one of "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]".

Here, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 21TM of this embodiment will be described. In the characteristic part 21TM of this embodiment, as the jackpot types, only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is completed, and a "normal jackpot" (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) that shifts to a low-probability/high-base state is performed, and a jackpot. A "variable probability big hit" is set in which high probability control and time saving control are executed after the end of the game to shift to a high probability / high base state.

The jackpot game state by the "3R jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. Furthermore, the big win game state by the "10R big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated.

The time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by "normal jackpot [50 times]" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times Before the game is executed, it ends by entering a jackpot game state, and the time saving control executed after the jackpot game state by "normal jackpot [100 times]" is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example). is executed, or the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of "variable probability big win [next time]" are continuously executed until another big win occurs after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the reoccurring jackpot is any of the types of "3R probability variable jackpot [next time]", "5R probability variable jackpot [next time]", and "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]", the jackpot game state ends. Since the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again later, a so-called continuous game state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without passing through the normal state is established.

For example, the jackpot game state of "3R normal jackpot [50 times]" is a normal game in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is an open jackpot, shifts to a low-probability/high-base state after the jackpot game state ends, and the time-saving control executed after that is that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), Alternatively, it is a jackpot type that ends when a jackpot game state is entered before the predetermined number of special game games are executed. In addition, the jackpot game state by "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]" is a normal opening in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. It is a big win, and after the big win game state is ended, the state is shifted to a high accuracy/high base state, and the high accuracy control and the time saving control executed after that are continued until the big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. It is a jackpot type to be executed.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 21TM of this embodiment, a mode in which nine types of jackpot types are provided is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. More than one type may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 Up to 176 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [50 times]", 177 to 179 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [50 times]", and 180 to 290 are assigned to "3R variable jackpot [next time ]”, 291 to 293 are assigned to “5R probability variation jackpot [next time]”, and 294 to 299 are assigned to “10R probability variation jackpot [next time]”. Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 , 0 to 134 are assigned to "3R normal jackpot [100 times]", 135 to 164 are assigned to "5R normal jackpot [100 times]", and 165 to 179 are assigned to "10R normal jackpot [100 times]”, 180 to 203 are assigned to “3R probability variable jackpot [next time]”, and 204 to 263 are assigned to “5R probability variable jackpot [next time]”, 294 ~ 299 are assigned to "10R probability variable jackpot [next time]". Also, when the set value is "2" to "6", the same determination value as when the set value is "1" is assigned within the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2.

Thus, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the special game of the first special symbol, regardless of which set value is set, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table. ing. Similarly, when a big win occurs in the special game with the second special symbol, a common determination value is assigned in the big win type determination table regardless of which setting value is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the game state, when it is controlled to a low probability state and a low base state (low probability / low base state: normal state), a low probability state and a high base state (low probability / high base state) : Time saving state) and may be controlled to a high probability state and a high base state (high probability / high base state: variable probability state).

As described above, in this embodiment, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol, when the high set value is within 50 fluctuations after the end of the big hit game (the first The ratio of occurrence of the next big win in the first period) is higher than the ratio of occurrence of the next big win within 50 variations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. Further, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, the next big win does not occur after the big win game ends when the set value is high, and after 51 variations (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after 51 variation (second period) without generating the next big win after the end of the big win game when the set value is low.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, when it is a high set value, the next within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big hit game The rate of occurrence of the big win is higher than the rate of occurrence of the next big win within 100 fluctuations (first period) after the end of the big win game when the set value is low. Further, when the big win game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, when the high set value is reached, the next big win does not occur after the end of the big win game, and after 101 variations (second period). The rate of rushing into is lower than the rate of rushing into after the 101 variation (second period) without the occurrence of the next big win after the end of the big win game when the set value is low.

(Relationship between game state and effect symbols and effect mode)
First, each game state (low probability / low base state: normal state, low probability / high base state: time saving state, high probability / high base state: variable state), each production pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, 2nd small pattern), and the relationship between each production mode (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 indicate whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbols. is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 where the first small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed as the first small pattern display area 5l1, the first small pattern display area 5c1, and a first small pattern display area 5r1, and the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left as a second small pattern display area 5l2, A second small pattern display area 5c2 and a second small pattern display area 5r2.

The first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to game states. In this embodiment, the variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. , which of the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display corresponds to which special symbol variable display the decorative symbol variable display is executed depends on the game state.

As the game state in this embodiment, as described above, low probability / low base state (may be referred to as normal state), low probability / high base state (may be referred to as time saving state), high probability / There is a high base state (sometimes referred to as a variable probability state). And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the decoration design corresponds to the first special design. On the other hand, if the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state), (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state), in which case Also, the decorative design corresponds to the second special design.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative design and the first small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and the second small design is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. However, in the case of (ii) to (iii), the decorative design and the second small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, and the first small design is the first special design. It becomes information corresponding to the variable display. In the following description, "Special Figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "Special Figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

In FIG. 12-4 (A), the game state is low probability / low base state (normal state), the decoration pattern and the first small pattern correspond to the first special pattern, and the second small pattern is the second It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it respond|corresponds to a special design. In addition, FIG. 12-1 (B) shows that the game state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), the decorative pattern and the second small pattern correspond to the second special pattern, and the first small pattern is It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it respond|corresponds to a 1st special design. 12-4 (C1) and (C2), respectively, the game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state), and the decoration pattern and the second small pattern correspond to the second special pattern 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first small symbol corresponds to the first special symbol; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a first pending display area 21TM011 for displaying the first pending storage number (0 to 4 first pending displays 21TM010). In the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a second pending display area 21TM021 for displaying the second pending storage number (0 to 4 second pending displays 21TM020) is provided. In addition, at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, an active display 21TM030 is displayed which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed and information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols being executed. An active display area 21TM031 is provided.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first reserved display area 21TM011). A second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025 for displaying the second reserved memory number is provided in the right part of the screen (above the second reserved memory display area 21TM021). As described above, the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 for displaying the first small patterns corresponding to the first special patterns. In the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5, second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying second small patterns corresponding to the second special patterns are provided.

Here, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, a number of objects (round images) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories are displayed, and in the second reserved display area 21TM021, objects corresponding to the number of second reserved memories are displayed. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the first reserved memory count special display area 21TM015, and the second reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the second reserved memory count special display region 21TM025. be. The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 21TM011 is wider than the numerical display range in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and the first reserved memory number is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011. It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 21TM015. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 21TM021 is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021. 2 is displayed with higher visibility than the number of reserved memories special display area 21TM025.

Also, in the first reserved display area 21TM011, when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed. (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state) and (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the object itself is not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number are displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011 according to the game state. On the other hand, the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 displays the first reserved memory number regardless of the game state (even when the game state is any one of (ii) to (iii)). Therefore, even when the player is in a game state (any of (ii) to (iii)) in which no object is displayed in the first reserved display area 21TM011, by checking the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, A first reserved memory number can be grasped.

Also, in the second reservation display area 21TM021, when the gaming state is in either state of (ii) low probability / high base state (time saving state) and (iii) high probability / high base state (variable probability state) , the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number is displayed, but when the game state is (i) low probability/low base state (normal state), the objects themselves are not displayed. Thus, objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number are displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021 according to the game state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory count special display area 21TM025 displays the second reserved memory count regardless of the game state (even when the game state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) where no object is displayed in the second reserved display area 21TM021, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by confirming the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. can be done.

Also, in the active display area 21TM031, regardless of the game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is displayed. ing.

The example shown in FIG. 12-4(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 3 and the second reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "0" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three first A pending display 21TM010 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the first special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (the first 1 information corresponding to the special symbol) is being executed, and in response to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing", the second The combination (in this example, "245") of the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the two small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 continues. are displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 12-4(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode of "chance time". When the production mode is "chance time", the background image of the decoration pattern is an "evening image" representing an evening landscape including the evening sky and mountains, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. will be displayed.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second A pending display 21TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

FIGS. 12-4 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state), respectively. As shown in FIG. 12-4 (C1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high accuracy/high base state, after the game state shifts to a high accuracy/high base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, Until the special game is executed 50 times or 100 times), or until the jackpot game state is reached before the special game is executed the predetermined number of times, the game state is in a low probability / high base state (time saving state ), the presentation mode is controlled to "chance time". As described above, when the production mode is "chance time", the "evening image" representing the evening scenery including the evening sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. Chance time" will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (C2), after the game state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state, a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) without becoming a jackpot game state. When the special game is executed, it is controlled to the production mode "FEVERZONE". When the production mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" representing a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and "FEVERZONE" is displayed in the center of the screen. characters will be displayed.

In this embodiment, after the game state transitions to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or the predetermined A period until the jackpot game state is reached before the number of special game is executed is referred to as a first period. In addition, after the game state shifts to the high probability / high base state, the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without becoming a big hit game state (this In the example, after the 51st time or after the 101st time) is referred to as the second period.

In addition, after the game state moves to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) until the special figure game is executed, or the predetermined number of special The period until the jackpot game state is reached before the game is executed is referred to as the first period, as in the case of the high-probability/high-base state. On the other hand, after the game state shifts to the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) without entering the jackpot game state. The later period (in this example, the period after the 51st or 101st time, and the period after the low probability/low base state (normal state)) is not referred to as the second period.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C1), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025, and three second A pending display 21TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 21TM031, an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-4 (C2), when the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is 3, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015, and "3" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 21TM025. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first small symbols (sub (Information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is a symbol) is being displayed, and the result of the variation display of the previously executed (most recently executed) first special symbol is "missing". Then, a combination (in this example, "134") of the first small patterns (information corresponding to the first special patterns) indicating that the variation display result is "loss" in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 ) is continuously displayed, and the variable display of the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) is performed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2.

In this embodiment, during the period (second period) during which the effect mode is controlled to "FEVERZONE", even when the number of second pending memories is 1 or more, the second pending display is displayed in the second pending display area 21TM021. 21TM020 is not displayed. Further, even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031. The square object itself indicating the active display area 21TM031 is also not displayed.

This is because, in the second period, the variation display with an extremely short variation display period (high-speed variation) continues until the display result becomes a "jackpot" (variation display according to the variation pattern of the direct jackpot). because it is executed. When such high-speed fluctuations are continuously executed, in order to ensure that the player recognizes the display result of each fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation), the variable display of the decoration pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is performed. It is necessary to draw attention to the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in which is executed. Therefore, in the second period, the pending display and the active display are not displayed, and the player's attention is directed to the display result of the currently executed variable display (high-speed fluctuation).

In addition, not limited to such a form, when the production mode is "chance time" (when it is the first period), the pending display or active display is not displayed, and when the production mode is "FEVERZONE" (first period) 2 periods), a pending display or an active display may be displayed.

(Game flow)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of this embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of production modes (normal mode, chance time, FEVERZONE) corresponding to the game state are provided, and the production control CPU 120 can control the plurality of production modes.

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state) and the performance mode is controlled to the normal mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal jackpot". When any one of ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'' is achieved, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win" and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability/high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display is started and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal jackpot". , ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'', it is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win" and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability/high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

When the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time", the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "3R normal jackpot". , ``5R normal jackpot'', ``10R normal jackpot'', ``3R probability variable jackpot'', ``5R probability variable jackpot'', and ``10R probability variable jackpot'', it is controlled to a jackpot game state. If the result of the variable display is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is changed to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time". Further, when the result of the variable display is any one of "3R probability variable big win", "5R probability variable big win" and "10R probability variable big win", after the big win game state ends, the game state is high probability/high base state. (probability variable state), and the production mode is controlled to "chance time".

From when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and the production mode is controlled to the "chance time" until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example). When no big hit occurs, the game state shifts from the low-probability/high-base state (time saving state) to the low-probability/low-base state (normal state), and the production mode shifts from the chance time to the normal mode. .

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of special symbols By the end of the variable display, the variable display results of the special symbols are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R probability variable jackpot". , the game state shifts to the low probability/low base state (or the game state becomes high A suggestion effect (in this example, a continuous challenge effect of a failure mode) is executed. Then, at the timing when the variation display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) is completed, the game state falls from the low probability/high base state (time saving state) to the low probability/low base state (normal state). From the fluctuation display of , the production mode becomes the normal mode.

From when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) and the production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example) When no big hit occurs in , the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) continues, and the performance mode shifts from ``chance time'' to ``FEVERZONE''.

Specifically, after the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) (after the production mode is controlled to "chance time") a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times) of special symbols By the end of the variable display, the variable display results of the special symbols are "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", "10R normal jackpot", "3R probability variable jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and "10R probability variable jackpot". , the game state is the high accuracy/high base state and the high accuracy/high base state is maintained in response to the predetermined number of times (the 50th or 100th time) of the variable display. (or that the game state shifts to the low-probability/low-base state). Even after the variable display of the predetermined number of times (50th or 100th time) ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) continues, and the production mode becomes "FEVERZONE" from the next variable display.

In this way, since the gaming state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), until the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) is executed, or the predetermined number of times The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the special game is executed. In addition, since the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), until the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) is executed, or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times The production mode is controlled to "chance time" until the jackpot game state is reached before the game is executed.

That is, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), whichever Since the production mode is controlled to "chance time" even in the game state of , the common "evening image" will be displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the common "chance time" characters will be displayed at the top of the screen. will be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), the second It becomes possible to share the performance of one period, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the currently controlled game state. In addition, even when the game state is controlled to a low probability / low base state (time saving state), by giving the player a sense of expectation that the game state is a high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the game state It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when is in the low-probability/low-base state (time-saving state).

(Variation pattern determination)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, there is a variation pattern determination table for losing, which is used when it is determined in advance that the variable display result will be "loss", and a variable display result is a "big hit". A big hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table referred to when the gaming state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) A variation pattern determination table that is referred to when the For each game state, a variation pattern determination table for losing used when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "loss" and when it is predetermined to make the variable display result "big hit" It is assumed that a big hit variation pattern determination table to be used is prepared in advance.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss, the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", and the fluctuation of "super reach loss" A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to each variation pattern of the pattern.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation display period is 1 second when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)", and when the fluctuation pattern is judged to be "non-reach out (shortened fluctuation)" The variable display period is 5 seconds, the variable display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "normal reach out", and the variable display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be "super reach out". seconds.

The fluctuation pattern of "no reach (high-speed fluctuation)" and the fluctuation pattern of "no reach (shortening fluctuation)" do not establish reach after the fluctuation display is started, and the fluctuation display result is "lost". It is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that is stopped and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display period is 5 seconds when it is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)", whereas it is determined to be a "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. Since the fluctuation display period is 1 second, when there is a pending memory, when it is determined as a fluctuation pattern of "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)", it is regarded as a "non-reach loss (shortening fluctuation)" fluctuation pattern. It becomes possible to consume the reserved memory at shorter intervals than when it is determined.

In the big hit variation pattern determination table, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is set for each variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" variation pattern, the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern. A predetermined random value within a possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

In this embodiment, the variation display period is 10 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "direct jackpot", and the variation display period is 30 seconds when the variation pattern is determined to be a "normal reach jackpot". The variation display period is 60 seconds when the variation pattern is determined as "super reach jackpot".

In this embodiment, the variation pattern of the "direct jackpot" is a variation in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the result of the variation display is a "jackpot" is displayed in a stopped state after the start of the variation display, without reaching the establishment of the reach. It's a pattern. Since the production that achieves reach is not executed, the fluctuation display period when it is determined to be a "straight hit" variation pattern is the other fluctuation that executes the production that establishes reach when the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is shorter than the variable display period of the patterns ("normal reach jackpot", "super reach jackpot").

In this embodiment, in the variation patterns with normal reach ("normal reach lost" and "normal reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the final display result is displayed without executing a super reach effect (battle effect), which will be described later. Fixed stop.

In this embodiment, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as a super reach effect. A battle effect is executed to inform whether or not a big hit is won. Then, when the final display result is "big win" (when the big win pattern is confirmed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character, and when the final display result is "losing" (losing pattern) is fixed and stopped), an effect is executed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.

FIG. 12-6(A) is a fluctuation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final fluctuation]. This first period [excluding the final variation] is the first period (the period of 50 special symbols games after the variation display result of the first special symbol becomes a "jackpot", or the period of the second special symbol From the period of 100 special games after the variation display result is "big hit") to the final variation of the first period described above (in this example, the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit") The period excluding the 50th special game after the second special symbol, or the 100th special game after the second special symbol variation display result is a "jackpot") (that is, the first special symbol variation display The period of 49 special games after the result is a "big hit", or the period of 99 special games after the second special symbol fluctuation display result is a "big hit") be. Here, of FIG. 12-6 (A), FIG. 12-6 (A1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (A2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the first period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [Excluding the final variation], when the determination result at the start of the variation is determined to be "losing", the common [losing] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (A1) ), the variation pattern will be determined. In addition, the first period [excluding the final variation] when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) When the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be a "jackpot" in [Excluding the final variation], the variation pattern determination table for [for jackpot] common in any game state (Fig. 12-6 (A2) ), the variation pattern will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A1), in the variation pattern determination table for loss, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 750 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " 751 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss", and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach loss". It is Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 750 are assigned to the variation pattern of "non-reach deviation (shortened variation)", and 751 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", and 901 ~ Up to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach out". In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "no", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 20 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " 21 to 50 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot", and 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 20 are assigned to the "direct jackpot" variation pattern, 21 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of Reach Jackpot. In this way, in the first period excluding the final variation, when the display result is "big hit", the selection ratio of each of the plurality of variation patterns is common regardless of the set value.

FIG. 12-6(B) is a variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation]. This first period [final fluctuation] means the final fluctuation of the first period described above (in this example, the 50th special game after the fluctuation display result of the first special symbol is a "jackpot", or This is the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit"). Here, of FIG. 12-6 (B), FIG. 12-6 (B1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (B2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

That is, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) And, when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "missing", the variation pattern based on the common [loss] variation pattern determination table (FIG. 12-6 (B1)) in any gaming state will be determined. Also, the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), and the final variation of the first period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) , when the determination result at the start of variation is determined to be "big hit", the variation pattern based on the common [for big hit] variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (B2)) in any game state will be determined.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B1), in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, if the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 will be described later. It is assigned to the variation pattern of “suggestion effect (disappearance)”. Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive effect (loss)". In this way, when the display result is "mismatch" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (B2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "suggestive production (jackpot)". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the "suggestive effect (big hit)" variation pattern. In this way, when the display result is "big hit" in the final variation of the first period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

The suggestive effect is a effect that suggests a transition from the first period to the second period (that the high base state of the game state continues), and whether or not to transition from the first period to the second period ( Whether or not the high base state of the game state continues) is an effect to notify. In this embodiment, as shown in later-described FIGS. 12-13, a continuous challenge effect is executed as a suggestive effect.

In the continuous challenge effect, as shown in later-described FIGS. 12-13, the characters "continuous challenge" and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed, and a character 21TM300 is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become.

When the currently controlled game state is the low probability/high base state (time saving state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, A continuous challenge presentation of the failure mode is executed, the characters "failure" and the object "?" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state) by displaying the character "failure" or the object indicating "?" on the image display device 5 suggesting that the continuous challenge effect has failed. The player is informed of what to do.

When the currently controlled game state is a high probability/high base state (variable probability state), in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, A continuous challenge presentation of the success mode is executed, the characters "success" and the object "o" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. By displaying on the image display device 5 the characters "success" or an object indicating "○" indicating that the continuous challenge effect was successful, the continuous challenge effect is successful and the game state is high certainty/high. The player is informed that the base state (probability variable state) will continue.

FIG. 12-6(C) is a variation pattern determination table for the second period. This second period is, as described above, after the game state shifts to the high accuracy/high base state, the special figure of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times or 100 times) without becoming a big hit game state. It is a period after the game is executed (in this example, after the 51st time or after the 101st time). Here, of FIG. 12-6 (C), FIG. 12-6 (C1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for losing, and FIG. 12-6 (C2) is a variation pattern determination for big hit It is a figure which shows an example of a table.

In other words, in the second period when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state), when the determination result at the start of the fluctuation is determined to be "missing", the [for losing] variation pattern determination table ( A variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 12-6 (C1)). Also, in the second period when the gaming state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state), when the judgment result at the start of the fluctuation is judged to be "big hit", the [for big hit] fluctuation pattern judgment table ( A variation pattern is determined based on FIG. 12-6 (C2)). On the other hand, if the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second period (Fig. 12-6 (C1), (C2)) not.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (C1), in the deviation variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach out of reach (high-speed fluctuation)". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach deviation (high-speed fluctuation)". As described above, when the display result is "mismatch" in the second period, a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (C2), in the big hit variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", 1 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 are " It is assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit". Also, in any of the setting values "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", the MR3 determination value Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit". Thus, in the second period, when the display result is "big hit", a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the set value.

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 1 jackpot)
In FIG. 12-7 (A1), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state is low after the jackpot game ends. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when shifting to the definite/high base state (time saving state) and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 12-7 (A2), the variation display result of the first special symbol is one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", and the game state is high after the end of the big hit game It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when moving to the definite/high base state (variable definite state) and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A1), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", a big hit is achieved. After the game is over, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) in the period of 49 times of the special-design game after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Then, in the 51st and later special symbol games after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A2), when the variation display result of the first special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", a big hit After the game is over, the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) in the period of 49 times of the special symbol game after the variable display result of the first special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(A).

Next, in the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Then, in the 51st and later special symbol games after the variable display result of the first special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

(Variation pattern determination table referenced after special figure 2 jackpot)
In FIG. 12-8 (B1), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", and the game state is low after the jackpot game ends. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when shifting to the definite/high base state (time saving state) and the execution timing of each effect. In FIG. 12-8 (B2), the variation display result of the second special symbol is one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", and the game state is high after the end of the big hit game. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the variation pattern determination table referred to when moving to the definite/high base state (variable definite state) and the execution timing of each effect.

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (B1), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R normal jackpot", "5R normal jackpot", and "10R normal jackpot", a big hit is achieved. After the game is over, the game state shifts to a low probability/high base state (time saving state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state) in the period of 99 special-design games after the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the game state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time saving state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(B). At this time, the production control CPU 120 executes a continuous challenge production in a failure mode. After the variable display ends, the game state shifts to a low-probability/low-base state (normal state).

Then, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24.

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (B2), when the variation display result of the second special symbol is any one of "3R probability variable big hit", "5R probability variable big hit", and "10R probability variable big hit", a big hit After the game is over, the game state shifts to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state).

Executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variable state) in the period of 99 times of the special symbol game after the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "big hit". The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [excluding the final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(A).

Next, in the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the second special symbol is "big hit", it is executed when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the first period [final variation] shown in FIG. 12-6(B). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous challenge effect of the success mode. Then, even after the variable display ends, the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is continued.

Then, in the 101st and later special symbol games after the variation display result of the second special symbol is "big win", the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state). The variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determination table for the second period shown in FIG. 12-6(C).

As shown in Figure 12-6, the deviation pattern determination table for each period (1st period [excluding final fluctuation], 1st period [final fluctuation], and 2nd period) is common regardless of the set value is.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which a certain "normal reach out" (fluctuation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] fluctuation pattern determination table (See FIG. 12-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 751 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of "normal reach deviation", so [{(900−751+1)/997}×100=15%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach out”, so [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%].

Therefore, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which the period "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach out" (variable display period is 60 seconds) is [15+10=25%].

Also, in the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "normal reach failure", which is a variable display period longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). ” (variation display period is 30 seconds) or “super reach loss” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected, the variation pattern determination table for loss in the second period (see FIG. 12-6 (C1)) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variable display result is "loss", "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach failure" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern. The ratio is [(0/997)×100=0%] because none of the MR3 decision values range from 1 to 997 is assigned.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is longer than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 5 seconds) The rate at which a certain “normal reach out” (variable display period is 30 seconds) or “super reach out” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is [15 + 10 = 25%], whereas the second period , when the variable display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "normal reach failure" (variation display period is 30 seconds) longer than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) or The rate at which “super reach out” (variable display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [(0/997)×100=0%]. Thus, in the first period, "normal reach out" (variable display period is 30 seconds) or "super reach The ratio of selecting "missing" (variation display period is 60 seconds) is higher than in the second period.

Also, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) The rate of selection of the period "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is based on the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss of the first period [excluding the final fluctuation] (Fig. 12-6 (A1 ))).

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the ratio of "non-reach loss (fast fluctuation)" (fluctuation display period is 1 second) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, Since no determination value is assigned in the range of 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, [(0/997)×100=0%].

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the variation pattern is "non-reach", which is a variation display period shorter than "non-reach failure (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds). The rate of selection of “loss (high-speed fluctuation)” (variation display period is 1 second) can be calculated based on the variation pattern determination table for deviation for the second period (see FIG. 12-6 (C1)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "non-reach failure (fast variation)" (variation display period is 1 second) as the variation pattern is within the range of the judgment value of MR3. Of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "non-reach deviation (high-speed variation)", so [{(997−1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation display period is shorter than "non-reach loss (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) The rate of selecting a certain "non-reach loss (high-speed fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) is [0%], while the result of the change display is "loss" in the second period. At times, the rate at which "non-reach out (fast fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second) shorter than "non-reach out (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern is [100%]. In this way, in the second period, "non-reach out (fast fluctuation)" (variation display period is 1 second), which is a shorter fluctuation display period than "non-reach out (shortened fluctuation)" (variation display period is 5 seconds) ) is selected more frequently than in the first period.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 12-6, each period (1st period [excluding final fluctuation], 1st period [final fluctuation], and 2nd period) The big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is set to the set value It is common regardless.

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot", which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds) '' (variation display period is 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (A2)) for the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is the judgment value of MR3 Of the range 1 to 997, 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern, so [{(997−51+1)/997}×100=95%].

Further, in the second period, when the result of the variation display is "big hit", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a longer variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). Period 60 seconds) can be calculated based on the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variable display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" (variation display period is 60 seconds) as the variation pattern is in the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. Since none of the determination values is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [(0/997)×100=0%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "super reach jackpot", which is a variation display period longer than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds) ” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is selected is [95%]. ” (variation display period is 30 seconds), the rate of selecting “super reach jackpot” (variation display period is 60 seconds) is [0%]. Thus, in the first period, the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" (variation display period is 60 seconds), which is a longer fluctuation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is second. higher than the period.

In addition, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). The ratio of selecting "big hit" (variation display period is 10 seconds) can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (A2)) for the first period [excluding the final variation].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is a "jackpot", the percentage of the variation pattern "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) is selected as the judgment value of MR3. Since 1 to 20 in the range 1 to 997 are assigned to the "straight hit" variation pattern, [{(20-1+1)/997}×100=2%].

Also, in the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), which is a shorter variation display period than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) can be calculated based on the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (C2)).

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds) as the variation pattern is out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3. , none of the judgment values are assigned to the variation pattern of "straight hit", so [{(997−1+1)/997}×100=100%].

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is "direct jackpot", which is a variation display period shorter than "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds). (10 seconds of variable display period) is selected is [2%], while in the second period, when the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is "normal reach big hit". The rate at which the “direct jackpot” (variation display period is 10 seconds) shorter than (variation display period is 30 seconds) is selected is [100%]. Thus, in the second period, the rate of selecting the "direct jackpot" (variation display period is 10 seconds), which is a shorter variation display period than the "normal reach jackpot" (variation display period is 30 seconds), is the same as in the first period. is higher than

In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the rate of selecting a variation pattern that is a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period, and in the second period, the predetermined variation When the game state is in a high accuracy/high base state, the ratio of selecting a variation pattern whose variation display period is shorter than the variation display period is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the game machine in which the setting can be changed in this embodiment, when the game state is the high accuracy/high base state, a high setting value (for example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6") In this case, the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5) than when the set value is set to a low set value (for example, the set value is “1” to “3”). It has become. Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big win is less than when the low set value is set, and the next big win can be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in this embodiment, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting a variation pattern having a variation display period longer than the predetermined variation display period is higher than in the second period. As a result, even if the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is set to "4" to "6"), the time to win the big win when the game state is the high probability/high base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively long (prevent it from being excessively short), suppress gambling from becoming excessively high, and realize healthy game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is high accuracy / high base state, if a low set value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), a high set value (For example, the setting value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until the next big win is won is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals. However, there is a problem that the user loses interest in the game.

However, in this embodiment, in the second period, the rate at which a variation pattern with a variation display period shorter than the predetermined variation display period is selected is higher than in the first period [excluding the final variation]. As a result, even if the set value is set to a low value (for example, the set value is set to "1" to "3"), the time to win the jackpot when the game state is the high probability/high base state. It is possible to make the interval relatively short (prevent it from being excessively long), thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

As described above, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, in the variation patterns involving super reach ("super reach failure" and "super reach jackpot"), after the reach state is established, the friend character and the enemy character is executing a battle performance for informing whether or not a jackpot is won by performing a battle.

In the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "losing", the ratio of "super reach losing" selected as the fluctuation pattern is It can be calculated based on the fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (A1)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "missing", the ratio of selecting "super reach missing" as the variation pattern is: Since 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach out", it is [{(997-901+1)/997}×100=10%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" as the variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern determination table for failure of the second period (Fig. 12-6 (C1) ) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variation display result is "loss", the ratio of selecting "super reach failure" as the variation pattern is " It is [(0/997)×100=0%] because it is not assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach lost".

As shown in Figure 12-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the percentage of "super reach loss" selected as the fluctuation pattern is [10%], as shown in FIG. 12-6 (C1), in the second period, when the fluctuation display result is "loss", the fluctuation pattern is "super reach failure". The selected percentage is [0%]. Thus, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of selecting the "super reach out" fluctuation pattern in the second period getting higher. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Similarly, in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern is the first period [excluding the final variation] It can be calculated based on the big hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12-6 (A2)).

In the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is, out of the range of 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, Since 51 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [{(997-51+1)/997}×100=95%].

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is determined by the second period big hit variation pattern determination table (Fig. 12-6 (C2) ) can be calculated based on

In the second period, when the variation display result is "big hit", the ratio of selecting "super reach big hit" as the variation pattern is " It is [(0/997)×100=0%] because it is not assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "super reach lost".

As shown in Figure 12-6 (A2), in the first period [excluding the final variation], when the variation display result is "big hit", the percentage of "super reach jackpot" selected as the variation pattern is [95%], while in the second period, as shown in FIG. The selected percentage is [0%]. In this way, in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" variation pattern is higher than the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern in the second period getting higher. That is, the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the ratio of execution of the battle effect in the second period.

Thus, the execution ratio of the battle effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect in the second period. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game within a predetermined period (first period) from the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in the second period after a predetermined period (first period) has passed since the end of the jackpot game state, the execution ratio of the battle effect is reduced, so that the variable display period is shortened. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the fact that the next big hit does not occur despite being controlled to the state (probability variable state).

Also, in this embodiment, when the game state is high accuracy / high base state, if a high setting value (for example, the setting value is "4" to "6"), a low setting value (For example, when the setting value is set to "1" to "3"), the probability of winning the jackpot is higher (1/41.2 to 1/33.5). Therefore, when a high set value is set, the number of fluctuations required to win the next big win is less than when the low set value is set, and the next big win can be won at short time intervals. become. As a result, the probability that the interval between occurrences of big wins will be excessively shortened increases, so that the gambling nature becomes excessively high, and a problem arises in that a sound gaming nature cannot be realized.

However, in this embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. As a result, even if the set value is set to a high value (for example, the set value is "4" to "6"), the first period [final Excluding fluctuations], the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with super reach with a longer fluctuation display period than in the second period is high, so the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively long (not excessively short It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, thereby realizing a healthy game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game state is high accuracy / high base state, if a low set value (for example, the set value is "1" to "3"), a high set value (For example, the set value is set to "4" to "6"). Therefore, when the set value is set to a low value, the number of fluctuations required until the next big win is won is greater than when the set value is set to a high value, and the big win is won at long time intervals. However, there is a problem that the user loses interest in the game.

However, in this embodiment, the execution ratio of the battle effect during the first period [excluding the final variation] is higher than the execution ratio of the battle effect during the second period. As a result, even when the setting value is set to a low value (for example, the setting value is "1" to "3"), when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state, in the second period, Since the rate of selection of variation patterns with super reach that has a longer variation display period than the first period [excluding the final variation] is low, the time interval for winning the jackpot is relatively short (not excessively long It is possible to prevent it from happening), and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Cut-in notice production)
Next, an example of executing a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, a cut-in notice effect can be executed as the notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect for notifying the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIGS. 12-12 (2), (3) and (4), which will be described later, when reach is established in the image display device 5, the push button 31B is pressed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate is displayed. When the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, a cut-in notice effect is executed, and " Cut-in images (cut-in image 21TM200A, cut-in image 21TM200B) displaying the characters "chance" are displayed on the image display device 5. FIG.

In this example, the character displayed in the cut-in image is the character "chance" as the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, and the ratio of whether or not to execute is selected depends on the display result (Fig. 12- 10 (B)) example is shown, but not limited to this, there are a plurality of presentation modes ("Chance", "Fever", etc.) with different displayed characters, and each presentation mode is displayed according to the display result. may be selected in different proportions.

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect, etc. (reach effect, etc.) is being displayed, a display mode (display layer is higher than the image related to the other effect, etc.) suddenly appears. (and appears to be displayed on the nearer side than images related to other effects, etc.). In addition, in the case of a configuration capable of executing a plurality of presentation modes, the player is also interested in which of the plurality of presentation modes the cut-in announcement presentation is performed.

(Setting suggestion production)
In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that receives the setting value designation command for designating the set value executes the effect corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value.

In this example, the set value is suggested to the player by changing the mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed according to the specified set value. Execute the first setting suggestion effect. When the first setting suggesting effect is not executed, no effect image is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. When the first setting suggestion effect is executed, effect images are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). be done. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design.

Modes of effect images displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the first setting suggestion effect is executed include a white mode, a blue mode, and a red mode. In this example, when the first setting suggesting effect in the white mode is executed, effect images emitting white light are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggesting effect in the blue mode is executed. , an effect image emitting blue light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and when the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed, an effect image emitting red light is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. indicate.

Further, in this example, when the cut-in notice effect is executed, the mode of the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the designated setting value, so that the player can see the set value. Executes the second setting suggestion effect that suggests . When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in image in the normal mode is displayed. The cut-in image in the normal mode is a cut-in image in which the character "chance" displayed in the cut-in image is displayed in white characters. When the cut-in announcement effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed, a cut-in image in blue mode or red mode is displayed. The cut-in image in blue mode is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the cut-in image are displayed in blue characters, and the cut-in image in red mode is a cut-in image. This is a cut-in image in which the characters "chance" displayed in the image are displayed in red characters.

(Effect determination process at the time of fluctuation start)
When starting variable display of special symbols, the CPU 103 executes a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the second reservation storage number subtraction designation command) to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 issues a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command that designates the display result (jackpot or lose, jackpot type in the case of a big hit), and variable display period and effect content of special symbols (Reach and super reach, etc.) to designate a variation pattern designation command, based on the fact that received one set of commands from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103), that the variation display of the special symbol is executed, And, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the contents of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the display result is determined, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 100, special symbols (first special It is possible to specify that the variable display of the symbol (or the second special symbol) has ended and the display result has been derived.

FIG. 12-9 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this fluctuation start effect determination process, whether or not to execute each of the first setting suggestive effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the second set suggestive effect and the mode of execution thereof are determined. In the following description, the game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) and the first period (50 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 100 fluctuations or less from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot) (Period), "the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period]", the gaming state is high probability / high base state (variable probability state) and the second The state (period) in which the period (51 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 1 jackpot, 101 fluctuations or more from the end of the special figure 2 jackpot) is defined as "the game state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [second period] There is a case.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the variable start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-described one set of commands (reserved memory number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) associated with the start of variable display of special symbols , production control pattern (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute production A collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of variation shown in FIG. 12-9.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether (i) the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period ] (step S21TM1000). (i) If the gaming state is a low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step YES in S21TM1000), the process proceeds to step S21TM1010 and thereafter. On the other hand, if (i) the gaming state is not the low probability/high base state (time saving state) and (ii) the gaming state is not the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step S21TM1000 NO), and proceeds to step S21TM1070 and thereafter.

Here, when the game state is a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) [first period], a big win occurs after the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state). It is within the first period until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this example). Also, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [second period], after the game state is controlled to a high probability / high base state, a predetermined number of times ( In this example, it is the second period (51st or 101st in this example) after the 50th or 100th special game has been executed.

Then, the effect control CPU120, (i) if the gaming state is low probability / high base state (time saving state), or (ii) gaming state is high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period ] (YES in step S21TM1000), the execution/non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined based on the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 12-10(A)). (step S21TM1010) and proceeds to step S21TM1020.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the first setting suggestion effect, a determination is made for determining whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode according to the set value. value is assigned. When the setting value is "1" or "2" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1" or "2"), the first setting suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 90%. decided not to execute, decided to execute the first set suggestion effect in the white mode at a rate of 5%, decided to execute the first set suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 3%, It is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 2%. Further, when the setting value is "3" or "4" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "3" or "4"), 90% of the first setting Decided not to execute the suggestive effect, decided to execute the first set suggested effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and decided to execute the first set suggested effect in the blue mode at a rate of 5%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 3%. Further, when the setting value is "5" or "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "5" or "6"), 90% of the first setting It is decided not to execute the suggestive effect, it is decided to execute the first set suggestive effect in the white mode at a rate of 2%, and the first set suggestive effect in the blue mode is determined to be executed at a rate of 3%. Then, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 5%.

Thus, when the set value is "1" or "2", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the first set suggestion effect in the white mode. is the highest (5%), the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is the second highest (3%), and the ratio of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is the lowest ( 2%). Further, when the set value is "3" or "4", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the blue mode first set suggestion effect. The percentage is the highest (5%), the percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is the second highest (3%), and the percentage of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is the lowest (2%). ). Further, when the set value is "5" or "6", the effect mode of the first set suggestion effect when the first set suggestion effect is executed is the red mode first set suggestion effect. The ratio is the highest (5%), the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is the second highest (3%), and the ratio of the execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is the lowest (2%). ).

That is, the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is a common rate (10% in this example) regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference, but the first setting of each effect mode Regarding the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed, when the setting is low (set value is "1" or "2"), the rate at which the first set suggestive effect in the white mode is selected is high, and when the setting is intermediate (set value is '3' or '4'), the percentage of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is high, and when the setting is high (the set value is '5' or '6'), the first setting suggestion in the red mode The ratio of performance execution is high. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern is "super reach out" or "super reach jackpot" (step S21TM1020). If the variation pattern is "super reach loss" or "super reach big hit" (YES in step S21TM1020), whether or not to execute cut-in notice effect is determined in the cut-in notice effect execution/non-execution determination table (Fig. 12-10 ( (see B)) (step S21TM1030), and proceed to step S21TM1040. On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not "Super Reach Lost" or "Super Reach Big Hit" (NO in step S21TM1020), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), in the execution/non-execution decision table for the cut-in notice effect, a determination value for deciding whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is assigned according to the display result. 20, when the display result is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is "missing"), 80% of the time, cut-in notice effect is not executed; It is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect at the rate of %. On the other hand, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is "big hit"), it is decided not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%. and decides to execute the cut-in announcement effect at a rate of 60%. In this way, when the cut-in foretelling effect is executed, the percentage of big wins is higher than when the cut-in foretelling effect is not executed. Therefore, the player will be interested in whether or not the cut-in announcement effect will be executed.

Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in announcement effect (step S21TM1040). If it is decided to execute the cut-in advance notice effect (YES in step S21TM1040), the execution/non-execution of the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set in the second setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table (Fig. 12- 10(C)) (step S21TM1050), and the process ends. If it has been decided not to execute the cut-in announcement effect (NO in step S21TM1040), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-10(C), in the execution/non-execution determination table for the second setting suggestion effect, a determination is made for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode according to the set value. value is assigned. When the setting value is "1", "3", or "5" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "1", "3", or "5"), 30% of the decisions are made not to execute the second setting suggestion effect, 50% of decisions are made to execute the second setting suggestion effect of the blue mode, and 20% of the decision is made to execute the second setting of the red mode. It decides to execute the suggestive production. Also, when the setting value is "2", "4", or "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "2", "4", or "6") decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 20%, and decides to perform the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 50%. It is decided to execute the 1 setting suggestion effect.

In this way, when the set value is "1", "3", or "5", with respect to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the blue mode second The ratio of executing the setting suggesting effect is higher than the ratio of executing the second setting suggesting effect of the red mode. Further, when the set value is "2", "4", or "6", the second setting suggestion in the red mode is displayed with respect to the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed. The rate at which the effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect of the blue mode is executed. That is, the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed is a common rate (30% in this example) regardless of the setting value, and there is no setting difference, but the second setting of each effect mode With respect to the ratio at which the suggestive effect is executed, when the odd number is set (the set value is "1", "3", or "5"), the ratio at which the second set suggestive effect in the blue mode is selected is the second in the red mode. Higher than the ratio of selecting the 2-setting suggesting effect, and when the even number is set (the set value is "2", "4", or "6"), the ratio of executing the second setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is red. It is higher than the rate at which the second setting suggestion effect of the aspect is selected. Therefore, the player will be interested in the effect mode when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

Also, (i) the gaming state is not a low probability / high base state (time saving state), and (ii) the gaming state is not a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period] (step S21TM1000 NO), (iii) It is determined whether the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (step S21TM1060). (iii) If the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), the process proceeds to step S21TM1070. (iii) If the gaming state is not the high-probability/high-base state [second period] (NO in step S21TM1060), the process ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result of the variable display is a "jackpot" (step S21TM1070). If the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the execution/non-execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are set in the execution/non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (Fig. 12-10 ( (see A)) (step S21TM1080), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display is not a "big hit" (NO in step S21TM1070), the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period] (YES in step S21TM1000), it is determined whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect ( step S21TM1020). That is, when the game state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES in step S21TM1060), only when the variation display result is "big hit" (YES in step S21TM1070), the first It is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (step S21TM1020). That is, when the gaming state is the high-probability/high-base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variation of the second period when the variation display result is "big win". ing.

Further, in this embodiment, the ratio of execution of the first setting suggestion effect is 10% regardless of the set value (see FIG. 12-10(A)). As described above, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [first period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined for each variable display regardless of the variable display result. The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of each variable display in the first period is 10%. On the other hand, as described above, when the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period], whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined only in the final variation of the second period. , In the second period, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 0% up to the last variation display where the variation display result is "big hit", and the final variation display result is "big hit". The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect of variation is 10%.

For example, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "probability variable big hit", after the game state shifts to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit game, 100 special symbols When the jackpot gaming state does not occur until the game is executed, the first period is 100 times, and whether or not the first setting suggestion performance is executed for each variation display in the first period (100 rotations). Since it is determined whether or not, the probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [{1-(90/100)̂100}×100=99.9%]. On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "probability variation big hit", in the second period (after 101st time) after 100 special game games have been executed without entering the big win gaming state. Since it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is to be executed only in the final variation of the second period when the display result is "big win", the final variation in the second period may be any number of revolutions. Also, the probability that the first setting suggestion effect is executed is [(10/100)×100=10%]. In this way, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period, so that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (probability variable state ), the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-9, when the game state is high probability/high base state [first period] (YES at step S21TM1000), whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined at step S21TM1010. In step S21TM1050, it is determined whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is to be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9, if the gaming state is the high probability/high base state [second period] (YES at step S21TM1060), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed at step S21TM1080. have decided. Thus, in the first period, two types of setting suggesting effects, the first setting suggesting effect and the second setting suggesting effect, are executed, and in the second period, one type of setting suggesting effect, only the first setting suggesting effect, is executed. is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (variable probability state).

Also, when the fluctuation display result is "loss", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A1), in the first period [excluding the final fluctuation], "super reach loss" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The ratio is [{(997−901+1)/997}×100=10%, since 901 to 997 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “super reach out”. ]. On the other hand, when the variation display result is "loss", as shown in FIG. Since none of the judgment values within the judgment value range of 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of “super reach out”, [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“loss of super reach”) in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern accompanied by super reach (“loss of super reach”) in the second period. .

Also, when the variation display result is "big hit", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A2), "super reach jackpot" is selected as the variation pattern in the first period [excluding the final variation]. The percentage is [{(997−51+1)/997}×100=95%, since 51 to 997 out of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997 are assigned to the “super reach jackpot” variation pattern. ]. On the other hand, when the variation display result is a "big hit", the ratio of selecting the "super reach jackpot" as the variation pattern when the variation display result is a "big hit" in the second period is determined by MR3. Since none of the determination values in the range of values 1 to 997 is assigned to the variation pattern of "super reach jackpot", it is [(0/997)×100=0%]. That is, the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach jackpot") in the first period is higher than the selection rate of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach jackpot") in the second period. .

Further, as described above, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the first period is higher than the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect in the second period. Thus, between the first period and the second period, the selection ratio of the variation pattern with super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot") is different, and between the first period and the second period, the Since the execution ratio of the 1-setting suggestion effect is different, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game during the period when the game state is controlled to the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state).

(Specific example of the first setting suggestion effect)
Next, specific examples of the first setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-11 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3). FIGS. 12-11 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first setting suggestion effect in the white mode is executed in the first period, FIGS. 12-11 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the blue mode first setting suggestion effect is executed in the second period.

(First setting suggestion effect in the first period)
As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (probability variable state) [first period], the production control CPU 120 controls the production mode to chance time It is When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A2), at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect in the white mode, and displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L. 2”, the decorative pattern “4” is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern “5” is stopped in the pattern display area 5R, and the effect images illuminated in white are respectively displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 21TM100A is displayed. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). do. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbols in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (A3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect image 21TM100A displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. is erased to end the first setting suggesting effect, and the decorative pattern "2" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "5" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. The second small symbol "2" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "5" is fixed and stopped.

(First setting suggestion effect in the second period)
As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [second period], the production mode is set to "FEVERZONE" by the production control CPU 120 controlled. When the effect mode is "FEVERZONE", a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative design, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. is executed, and in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small design (information corresponding to the second special design) is displayed variably, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B2), at the timing when the variable display of decorative symbols ends, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the first setting of the blue mode in response to the display result becoming a "jackpot". The performance is executed, and the decorative pattern "7" is stopped in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "7" in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" in the pattern display area 5R, and the pattern display area 5L is stopped. , 5C and 5R respectively display the effect image 21TM100B emitting blue light. The decoration pattern when the first setting suggestive effect is executed is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). do. That is, the display priority of the decorative design, the effect image, and the background image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is higher in the order of background image<effect image<decorative design. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbols in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the pattern is continued.

As shown in FIG. 12-11 (B3), at the timing when the CPU 103 terminates the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect image 21TM100B displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. is erased to terminate the first setting suggesting effect, and the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R. The second small symbol "7" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol "7" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2. The symbol "7" is fixed and stopped.

(Specific example of the second setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the second setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-12 (1) to (4). FIGS. 12-12 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. 12-12 (1), (2), and (4) are explanatory diagrams, and are displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image;

As shown in FIG. 12-12 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) [first period], the production mode is controlled to chance time by the production control CPU 120 It is When the production mode is chance time, an "evening image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "chance time" are displayed at the top of the screen. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, In the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "off", The combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 21TM031 displays an active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 21TM021 displays four second reserved displays 21TM020.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-12(2), the effect control CPU 120 puts "5" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing to establish the ready-to-win state in the variation pattern. is displayed in a stationary state, and characters of "reach!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the second small symbols continues in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. That is, in the first small design display area 5l1 corresponding to the design display area 5L in which the decoration design is stopped and displayed, and in the first small design display area 5r1 corresponding to the design display area 5R in which the decoration design is stop-displayed, The first small pattern is continuously variably displayed without being stopped and displayed.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B at the center of the screen while continuing the ready-to-win state. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become. Since the operation prompting display 21TM150 is an image with a higher display priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher), the player will feel that it is displayed in front of the background image and the decoration pattern. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. Here, if it is determined in the fluctuation start effect determination process that the cut-in notice effect is executed and the second setting suggestion effect is not executed, the cut-in notice effect is executed but the second setting suggestion effect is executed. does not run. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect and the second setting suggestion effect, the second set suggestion effect is executed together with the cut-in notice effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-12(3), the effect control CPU 120 executes a cut-in notice effect in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed. However, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed. In this example, the cut-in image 21TM200A in the normal mode (the cut-in image in which white characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 12-12 (4), the effect control CPU 120, when the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is displayed, cut-in notice effect is executed, and the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, a cut-in image 21TM200B in a red mode (a cut-in image in which red characters "Chance" are displayed) is displayed on the image display device 5 in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed. ing.

(Specific example of continuous challenge production)
Next, specific examples of continuous challenge effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-13 (1) to (7). FIGS. 12-13 (1) and (2) to (4) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the failure mode is executed. 12-13 (1) and (5) to (7) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 when the continuous challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-13 (1), the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special symbol game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", or the When the 100th special symbol game after the variable display result of the 2 special symbols is a "big hit" is being executed, the continuous challenge effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120. - 特許庁The performance control CPU 120 causes the characters "Continue Challenge" to be displayed in the central part of the screen of the image display device 5 and an operation prompting display 21TM150 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B, and a character in the lower right part of the screen. 21 TM300 is displayed. The operation prompting display 21TM150 includes an image simulating the push button 31B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 31B. It has become.

When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, the result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "missing". Correspondingly, the combination of decorative symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "missing" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, during the period during which the continuous challenge effect is executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern (information corresponding to the second special pattern) is not executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the reserved display area (first reserved display The reserved display (first reserved display 21TM010, second reserved display 21TM020) is not displayed in the area 21TM011 and the second reserved display area 21TM021). Also, neither the square object indicating the active display area 21TM031 nor the active display 21TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is displayed.

When the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, in FIGS. Based on being in a high base state (time saving state), a continuous challenge production of a failure mode is executed.

When the game state currently being controlled is the low-probability/high-base state (time-saving state), as shown in FIG. In response to the push button 31B being operated by the player when the player is in the game, the continuous challenge performance of the failure mode is executed, and the characters "failure" and the object "?" is displayed, and the character 21TM300A is displayed in the lower right part of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second symbol indicating that the display result is "lost". A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (4), when the game state is controlled to the low probability/low base state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the production mode is the normal mode, the "daytime image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "miss" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Then, the combination of decorative patterns ("417" in this example) indicating that the result of the variable display is "loss" is stopped and displayed, and the previously executed ( In response to the fact that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed most recently was "missing", the combination of the first small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, " 417") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variation display result of the second special design executed last time (executed most recently) is "off". In response to the event, the combination of the second small symbols ("245" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "loss" is continuously stopped and displayed.

Since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 . In addition, the active display is not displayed in the active display area 21TM031 because there is no variable display currently being executed.

On the other hand, when the push button 31B is operated by the player while the operation prompting display 21TM150 is being displayed, the currently controlled game state is set to high in FIGS. 12-13 (5) to (7). Based on the definite/high base state (variable definite state), the continuation challenge effect of the success mode is executed.

When the game state currently being controlled is the high probability/high base state (probability variable state), as shown in FIG. In response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the player is on the stage, a continuous challenge effect in a success mode is executed, and the characters "success" and the object "○" appear in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed, and the character 21TM300B is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 finishes the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second symbol indicating that the display result is "lost". A combination of small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) ("245" in this example) is fixed and stopped in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-13 (7), when the game state is continuously controlled to the high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the production mode is set to "FEVERZONE" by the production control CPU 120. controlled. When the presentation mode is "FEVERZONE", the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the characters "FEVERZONE" are displayed in the center of the screen. The effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 was "miss". Then, the combination of decorative symbols (“245” in this example) indicating that the variable display result is “loss” is confirmed and stopped, and the previously executed ( In response to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed most recently was "missing", the combination of the second small symbols indicating that the variation display result is "missing" (in this example, " 245") is continuously stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the variation display result of the first special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) is "off". In response to the event, the combination of the first small symbols ("417" in this example) indicating that the variable display result is "miss" is continuously stopped and displayed. In addition, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved memory number special display area 21TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 0. Therefore, “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 21TM025 of the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the final variation of the first period (in this example, the 50th special game after the variation display result of the first special symbol is a "jackpot", or the second special In the 100th special game after the variation display result of the symbols becomes a "jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 controls the transition from the first period to the second period (continuing the high base state). A continuation challenge production is executed as a suggestive production to suggest. According to such a configuration, even if it is controlled to any game state of low probability / high base state (time saving state) and high probability / high base state (variable probability state), the player continues Until the final variation of the first period in which the challenge performance is executed, the game can be played with expectations for the transition to the second period.

(other forms)
In the above-described gaming machine capable of changing the set value, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be simultaneously executed in parallel. Also, the game machine capable of changing the set value may be capable of controlling the game state to a small winning game state which is different from the big winning game state and which is advantageous for the player. For example, in a small winning game state, a game ball can win a prize in a special variable winning ball device different from the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole and the special variable winning ball device 7 forming the big winning hole. Become. Also, the game machine capable of changing the setting value may be capable of being controlled to a state (for example, a KT state described later) in which the frequency of small hits is increased.

For example, the special variable winning ball device is provided downstream of the variable winning ball device in the right gaming area. When the variable winning ball device is in the open state, the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side in the open state is extremely low, and when the variable winning ball device is in the closed state, it is opened. Control may be executed to increase the frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side that is in the state. According to such a configuration, in a high base state in which the variable winning ball device is opened for a long period of time (or the opening frequency is high), the special variable winning ball device is in the open state even if the player hits to the right. The frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing in is low, but the period in which the variable winning ball device is opened is short (or the opening frequency is low). The frequency (ratio) of game balls flowing into the variable winning ball device is increased.

For example, it is assumed that the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, it is assumed that there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. And, when the game state is controlled to a low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability state and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state: time saving state) When it is controlled, when it is controlled to a high probability state and 1KT state (high probability / 1st KT state; variable probability state), and when it is controlled to a high probability state and 2KT state (high probability / 2nd KT state: small hit RUSH state ) may be controlled by

In the first KT state among the KT states, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device is likely to be in an open state. There are very few cases where a game ball wins in the special variable winning ball device (for example, about 1 ball per 100 variations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur, and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device is lengthened. In the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the variable winning ball device on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device on the downstream side. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device will be in the open state due to the normal game is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small win when the second special symbol fluctuates is high, so the KT state is maintained. , a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the variation of the second special symbol, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In this way, as the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the variable winning ball device is controlled to a state where small wins are likely to occur and to a low base state. By shortening the opening time of the game ball, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device. According to such a configuration, as a high probability state advantageous to the player, it is possible to control to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) different from the high probability / high base state (probability variable state), and high probability It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the state.

(Other modifications)
(1) <Reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine>
In the above-described embodiment, once controlled to high probability / high base state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit game, the probability variable state continues until the next big hit occurs, but such Regardless of the form, the game state changes from a high probability/high base state to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the timing when a predetermined period has passed after the end of the big win game and before the next big win occurs. It may change.

For example, if the transition to the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) until the next big hit occurs or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed ) is maintained. Then, when the 100th variation display is completed without the occurrence of the next big win, the transition is made from the 101st variation display to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the next big win occurs. Until then, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. On the other hand, if the transition to the low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state) after the end of the jackpot game, until the next big hit occurs or 100 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state) ) is maintained, but from the 101st fluctuation display, the state shifts to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state). For the player, whether or not the 100th variable display can be overcome without falling to the normal state has a great influence on the degree of advantage thereafter. It is called a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine.

In such a reverse breakthrough type small hit RUSH machine, the 100th fluctuation after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state)) There are a first period until the end of the display and a second period from the 101st variable display to the occurrence of the next big win. In the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) longer than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period. It is assumed that the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a variation display period (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is higher than that for the first period.

In the first period of this example, in any game state (high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game, common as a background image is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is being controlled in the first period. Here, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the above-mentioned success mode is continued in the 100th variation display. A challenge performance is executed, and the transition from the 101st fluctuation display to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), and if the next big hit does not occur in the 100th variation display, the above-mentioned failure mode continuation challenge is performed in the 100th variation display. An effect is executed, and from the 101st variable display, the state shifts to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the game state is changed to a high probability in response to the execution of the variable display for a predetermined number of times before the next big hit occurs. / Since it is possible to shift to the 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

Also, for example, when the transition to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) occurs after the end of the big hit game, the high probability/first KT is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times. The state (variable probability state) may be maintained. Then, when the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times without the occurrence of the next big win, the fluctuation display after the end of the 50th small win game is changed to a high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state), and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) may be maintained until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, when the transition to the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, until the next big hit occurs or the number of occurrences of the small hit reaches 50 times, the low probability / 1KT state ( The time saving state) is maintained, but after the 50th small winning game is completed, the state is shifted to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state).

That is, after the end of the big hit game (after being controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) or the low probability/first KT state), the first period until the 50th small hit occurs, and the 50th time There is a second period from the end of the small winning game to the occurrence of the next big winning. In the first period of this example, in any game state (high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) or low probability / 1KT state (time reduction state)) controlled after the end of the jackpot game, common as a background image is displayed, it is difficult for the player to grasp which game state is being controlled in the first period. Here, when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the change to the high accuracy/first KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game is performed. In the variable display where the number of occurrences is the 50th, the continuous challenge effect of the success mode described above is executed, and from the next and subsequent variable display of the variable display where the number of occurrences of the small hit is 50 times, the high accuracy/second KT state (small Hit RUSH state). In addition, when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display until the number of occurrences of the small win reaches 50 times, the occurrence of the small win occurs. In the 50th variation display, the above-mentioned failure mode continuous challenge effect is executed, and from the next variation display in which the number of occurrences of small hits is 50, the low probability / non-KT state (normal state ).

In this way, when the game state is the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the game state is changed in response to the number of occurrences of the small hit becoming a predetermined number before the next big hit occurs. Since it is possible to shift to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). Further, by executing the continuous challenge effect at the predetermined time of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

(2) <Type 1/2 type mixer>
In a game machine of a type called the first type, a big win determination is performed based on establishment of a starting condition, and a big win game is executed when a big win is won. In addition, in a game machine of a type called the second type (wings), an opening and closing winning device having a feather accessory that can be opened and closed is provided, a game ball wins inside the opening and closing winning device, and the opening and closing winning device When winning a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside, a big hit game is executed. There is also a type of game machine called a 1st-2nd type mixer that fuses the 1st type and the 2nd type (feathers).

For example, in a one-and-two mixed machine, a big hit determination is made based on the establishment of the first start condition (for example, the game ball wins in the first start winning port), and when the big win is won, the first special The variation display result of the pattern becomes a big win pattern, and a big win game is executed. In addition, a big hit determination is performed based on the establishment of the second start condition (for example, the game ball has passed through the second start area (gate)), and when the big hit is won, the second special symbol is displayed as a variable display result. becomes a big win symbol, and a big win game is executed. Further, when a small prize is won, a small prize game is executed in which a feather accessory provided in the opening and closing winning device opens and closes, and subsequently, the game ball wins inside the opening and closing prize device while the feather accessory is open, and , when winning in a specific area (V winning opening) provided inside the opening and closing winning device, a jackpot game is executed.

In such a one-two-kind mixing machine, the player wins the game ball in the first start winning opening by hitting left in the low base state, and after the big hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is high. With the control to the base state, the game is played so as to pass the game ball through the second starting area by switching to the right hitting. For example, this high base state (right-handed period) is continued until a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) of the second special symbol variable display is completed, and a big hit occurs during the predetermined number of variable display of the second special symbol. Otherwise, the playing state will transition to the low base state.

Here, in the production based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variation display result of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) and the All the second special symbol fluctuation display results of each of the second reserved memories (for example, each of the three second reserved memories) existing at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol of the predetermined number of times is started are notified. You may do so. That is, when the second reserved memory number is 3 at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) in the high base state is started, the second special for the predetermined number of times It is assumed that the results of the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of four times are notified by the effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbol. Then, after the variable display of the second special symbol is completed for the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time), the variable display of the second special symbol is executed three times. As for the variable display, a variable pattern with an extremely short variable display period (for example, 1 second) is specified. In other words, from the player's point of view, it looks as if four times of variable display have been executed by the effect corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, the sixth time) of the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the one-and-two type mixing machine of this example, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), until the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of a big hit, or The first period corresponds to a period until a big hit occurs before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. Also, after the game state shifts to the high base state (time saving state), the period after the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (6 times) without the occurrence of a big hit, that is, the special figure of the predetermined number of times The period during which the special game for the second reserved memory number at the start of the game is being executed corresponds to the second period.

In such a one-two-kind mixer, in the first period, the rate at which the variation pattern having a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than the predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is selected is the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 1 second) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(3) <Variable falling machine>
As a pachinko game machine, in a state where the game state is controlled to a high probability state, a probability variable fall determination is executed for whether or not to shift the game state to a low probability state, and the game state is based on the result of the probability variable fall determination. There is a pachinko machine that shifts to a low probability state. And, the pachinko game machine 1 that executes such probability variable fall determination is called a probability variable fall machine.

For example, in the probability variable falling machine, if a "variable probability big hit" occurs, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (variable probability state) after the jackpot game state ends, and the variable display starts in the high probability / high base state (variable probability state) When the probability variation fall judgment is executed. Here, until the 100th variation display is started without the display result of the variation display executed in the high probability / high base state (probability variation state) becoming a "jackpot", (i) the 100th variation If it is determined that there is a "probable variable fall" in any of the probability variable fall judgments executed in response to the display, the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment (any of the 1st to 100th variable display ) is controlled to a low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) from the start, and after being maintained in a low accuracy / high base state (time saving state) until the 100th fluctuation display ends, a low accuracy / low base state ( normal state). Here, the period from when the high probability/high base state (probability variable state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state until the 100th variation display is executed without falling to the normal state and without the occurrence of the jackpot. corresponds to the first period.

On the other hand, (ii) if it is not determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in any of the probability variable fall determinations executed in response to the 100th variable display, at least the 100th variable display is completed. / Maintained in the high base state (probability variable state), when it is determined that "there is a probability variable fall" in the probability variable fall judgment executed in response to the 101st or later variable display, the variable display corresponding to the probability variable fall judgment is controlled to a low accuracy/low base state (normal state) from the start of Here, the period from the end of the 100th variation display in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) to the normal state or the occurrence of the next big hit corresponds to the second period.

In such a variable falling machine, in the first period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern that has a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the second period. High, in the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 3 seconds) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, in the first period, the rate at which a variation pattern having a longer variation display period (eg, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is selected is higher than that in the second period. In the second period, the rate of selecting a variation pattern with a shorter variation display period (eg, 1 second) than a predetermined variation display period (eg, 5 seconds) is higher than in the first period. However, the period other than the variable display period may be different between the first period and the second period. For example, in the first period, the design determination stop period (eg, 1.0 seconds) longer than the predetermined period (eg, 0.7 seconds), and in the second period, the predetermined period (eg, 0.7 seconds) A short symbol determination stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be used.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), in the first period, the ratio of selecting "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" as the fluctuation pattern is 0%. Although shown, it is not limited to such a form, and "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)" may be selected as the fluctuation pattern even in the first period.

For example, in addition to the jackpot types shown in this embodiment (see FIG. 12-3), when a jackpot of a type "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]" is provided, there is no 2R normal jackpot, so a round of jackpot games When the number of rounds is 2, the player can recognize that the jackpot type is "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]" and that it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (variable probability state) after the jackpot game. Become. Suppose, in the first period that shifts after the end of this "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]", a variation pattern that has a longer variation display period (for example, 10 seconds or more) than a predetermined variation display period (for example, 5 seconds) is selected. If the percentage of the winning rate is set higher than the second period, the variable display is made even though the player recognizes that the game state is a high probability state (probability variable state) and that the state will continue until the next big win. The longer the period, the less interesting it becomes. Therefore, a specific jackpot type such as "2R probability variable jackpot [next time]", for example, a type that confirms that the probability variable state will continue until the next jackpot when the jackpot game ends without a normal jackpot of the same number of rounds In the first period after the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern is determined based on the same variation pattern determination table as in the second period. As a result, it is possible to increase the percentage of determining the fluctuation pattern as "non-reach out (high-speed fluctuation)", shorten the fluctuation time in the first period, and prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, the selection ratio of the variable display period in the first period is different from the selection ratio of the variable display period in the second period. The execution ratio may be different from the execution ratio of the advance notice effect in the second period.

For example, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the corresponding display (suspended display, active display) based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the start of fluctuation. Here, the execution ratio of the change effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the change effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the change effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the change performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the change performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required for the occurrence of the next big hit is lengthened, so that gambling characteristics are prevented from becoming excessively high, and sound game characteristics can be realized, and at the same time, a change effect can be achieved. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the change performance to be lower than that in the first period, the change performance is executed at a high rate even though the big win is not generated for a long period of time, resulting in a decrease in interest. can be prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, based on the determination result at the time of starting winning or the determination result at the time of start of fluctuation, action effects (for example, the character is displayed on the suspension display or the active display) to execute an action) can be executed. Here, the execution ratio of the action presentation in the first period and the execution ratio of the action presentation in the second period may be different. Since the action effect can be executed in both the first period and the second period, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability/high base state (variable probability state). In the first period, since the variable display period is long, the action performance requiring a predetermined period can be executed at a high rate, and in the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the action performance should be low. As a result, in the first period, the period required until the next big hit occurs becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, thereby realizing a sound game property and effecting effects. By executing at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the action performance to be lower than that in the first period, the action performance is executed at a high rate even though the big win is not generated for a long period of time, resulting in a decrease in interest. can be prevented.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead foretelling effect that foretells the degree of expectation for a big hit of variable displays that have not been executed (variable displays whose execution is suspended). Here, the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the first period and the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect in the second period may be different. In both the first period and the second period, the look-ahead announcement effect can be executed, so that the interest of the game in the high-probability/high-base state (probability-variable state) can be improved. In the first period, since the variable display period is long, it is possible to execute the look-ahead foretelling performance requiring a predetermined period at a high rate, and for the second period, the variable display period is short, so the execution rate of the look-ahead foretelling performance is preferably low. As a result, in the first period, the period required for the occurrence of the next big hit is lengthened, so that gambling properties are prevented from becoming excessively high, sound game properties can be realized, and a look-ahead notice effect can be achieved. is executed at a high rate, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a long variable display period. In addition, in the second period, by setting the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice performance to be lower than that in the first period, the pre-reading notice performance is executed at a high rate even though the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time. can be prevented from decreasing.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of setting suggestion effects may differ between the first period and the second period. For example, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-10(A) may be 10% in the first period and 2% in the second period. Conversely, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 2% in the first period and 10% in the second period. In addition, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may differ according to the number of variable displays performed in the second period. For example, as the number of variable displays performed in the second period increases The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be increased as the inter-harmony becomes longer. Specifically, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect is 2% during the period of 101 to 150 fluctuations from the end of the jackpot game based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, but the period from 151 fluctuations to 200 fluctuations is the second The execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 5%, and after the 201st variation, the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect may be 10%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to a prolonged addiction between probability variations.

In the above embodiment, as a special effect related to setting suggestions, a first setting suggestion effect suggesting which of low settings (1, 2), intermediate settings (3, 4), and high settings (5, 6) and the second setting suggestion effect suggesting whether it is an odd number setting (1, 3, 5) or an even number setting (2, 4, 6). may be an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed or that the setting value has not been changed. For example, if the setting change mode for changing the setting value is controlled when the power is turned on, during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game during execution), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed. In addition, if the setting change mode is controlled and the setting value is changed according to the setting change operation, during the subsequent demonstration display or during the game (for example, if there is a pending memory or if the variable display of the special symbol is during execution), an effect suggesting that the setting value has been changed may be executed.

1 Pachinko machine
4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

The game machine performs variable display of decoration identification information and variable display of predetermined identification information different from the decoration identification information based on passage of a game medium into a starting area, and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player. hand,
setting means capable of setting a set value related to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state;
setting confirmation control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set by the setting means can be confirmed;
interrupt processing execution means for executing interrupt processing capable of executing game-related processing;
variable means for changing between a first state advantageous to the player and a second state disadvantageous to the player;
a predetermined game execution means capable of executing a predetermined game a plurality of times for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state;
variable timing means for timing a change period for changing the variable means to the first state;
a state notification means for notifying that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation state;
an effect executing means capable of executing a foretelling effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state;
As the preview performance,
a specific effect in which a specific light emitting means emits light and a specific sound is output based on the passage of the game medium through the starting area;
An operation effect involving an operation to the effect operation means;
including a movable body production that accompanies the movement of the movable body,
The setting confirmation control means is capable of controlling the setting confirmation state when power supply to the gaming machine is started and before the interrupt processing is permitted,
The interrupt process is permitted when the setting confirmation state ends, and after the interruption process is permitted, the setting confirmation state is not controlled until the power supply to the game machine is stopped,
When the power supply to the game machine is stopped while the change period is being clocked, and then the power supply to the game machine is resumed and the setting confirmation state is controlled, the setting confirmation state ends. The timing of the change period is interrupted until the setting confirmation state ends, and the timing of the change period is restarted;
When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the variable display of the predetermined identification information, the specific effect, the operation effect, and the movable object effect are not executed,
The production executing means is
Even when controlled to the setting confirmation state, it is possible to receive operation confirmation information for confirming the operation of the predetermined effect means,
When receiving the operation confirmation information in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute processing according to the operation confirmation information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images